JP2019037679A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To display a start storage display that enhances amusement of a player.SOLUTION: A game machine performs a game (a special symbol variable display game) on the basis of an establishment of a start condition and if the result of the game becomes a special result, generates a special game state giving a player a game value. The game machine includes: start storage means (a game control device 100) for extracting a prescribed random number on the basis of an establishment of a start condition and storing the same as a start storage of a game; start storage display control means (a presentation control device 300) for displaying a start storage display (a reservation during a standby) corresponding to the start storage; and prior determination means (the presentation control device 300) for determining the prescribed random number in advance before a game corresponding to the prescribed random number is performed. A centroid interval between start storage displays next to each other is set with a prescribed interval (a distance d1). The start storage display control means can display the start storage display with a display area selected on the basis of the result of the prior determination.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 67

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine that executes a game based on establishment of a start condition and generates a special gaming state that gives a player a gaming value when the result of the game becomes a special result.

  Conventionally, a variable display device that can display a variable display game that displays a plurality of identification information in a variable manner based on the winning of a game ball in the start winning area, and a player when the result of the variable display game results in a special result A gaming machine that generates an advantageous special gaming state, wherein a predetermined random number is extracted based on the winning of a game ball in the starting winning area, and a predetermined number is limited as a starting memory as a right to execute a variable display game A start storage means for storing, a start storage display control means for displaying a start storage display corresponding to the start storage, an in-execution information display control means for displaying an in-execution information display that is information relating to a running variable display game, Is known (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Laying-Open No. 2015-147099

In conventional gaming machines, it may not be possible to display a start memory display that enhances the interest of the player.
An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of displaying a start memory display that enhances the interest of the player.

In order to solve the above problems, the invention described in claim 1
In a gaming machine that executes a game based on establishment of a start condition and generates a special gaming state that gives a player a gaming value when the result of the game becomes a special result,
Starting storage means for extracting a predetermined random number based on the establishment of the starting condition and storing it as a start storage of the game;
Start memory display control means for displaying a start memory display corresponding to the start memory;
Pre-determining means for pre-determining the predetermined random number before the game corresponding to the predetermined random number is executed,
The center-of-gravity interval between the start memory displays adjacent to each other is set to a predetermined interval,
The start memory display control means can display the start memory display with a display area selected based on the result of the prior determination.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to display a start memory display that enhances the interest of the player.

It is the perspective view which looked at the gaming machine of one embodiment of the present invention from the front side. It is a front view of a game board. It is a figure explaining a winning device. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the control system of a gaming machine. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the control system of a gaming machine. It is a flowchart explaining a main process. It is a flowchart explaining a main process. It is a flowchart explaining an initial value random number update process. It is a flowchart explaining a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart explaining a payout command transmission process. It is a flowchart explaining a winning opening switch / state monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining special figure game processing. It is a flowchart explaining a start port switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining a hard random number acquisition process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure start port switch common process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure hold information determination process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure usual process. (A) is a flowchart explaining the special figure 1 fluctuation start process, (b) is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 fluctuation start process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure variation process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure display process. It is a flowchart explaining a usual game process. It is a flowchart explaining a usual figure normal process. It is a flowchart explaining the process during usual figure change. It is a flowchart explaining a process during normal map display. It is a flowchart explaining a process during a common figure. It is a flowchart explaining an external information edit process. It is a flowchart explaining an external information edit process. It is a flowchart explaining the main process in an effect control apparatus. It is a flowchart explaining a received command check process. It is a flowchart explaining a received command analysis process. It is a flowchart explaining prefetch symbol type command processing. It is a flowchart explaining prefetch fluctuation system command processing. It is a flowchart explaining a variable system command process. It is a flowchart explaining a change production setting process. It is a figure explaining an example of a sign production. It is a figure explaining an example of a sign production. It is a figure explaining an example of a sign production. It is a figure explaining an example of a sign production. It is a figure explaining an example of a sign production. It is a figure explaining an example of a sign production. It is a figure explaining an example of a sign production. It is a figure explaining an example of a sign production. It is a figure explaining an example of a sign production. It is a figure explaining an example of the modification of a sign effect. It is a figure explaining an example of the modification of a sign effect. It is a figure explaining an example of the modification of a sign effect. It is a figure explaining an example of the modification of a sign effect. It is a figure explaining an example of a pending | holding change effect. It is a figure explaining an example of a pending | holding change effect. It is a figure explaining an example of a pending | holding change effect. It is a figure explaining an example of an suggestion effect, a switching effect, and a hold effect. It is a figure explaining an example of a decoration special figure start memory display. It is a figure explaining an example of a decoration special figure start memory display. It is a figure explaining an example of a decoration special figure start memory display. It is a figure explaining an example of a decoration special figure start memory display. It is a figure explaining an example of a decoration special figure start memory display. It is a figure explaining an example of a decoration special figure start memory display. It is a figure explaining an example of a decoration special figure start memory display. It is a figure explaining an example of a decoration special figure start memory display. It is a figure explaining an example of a decoration special figure start memory display. It is a figure explaining an example of a decoration special figure start memory display. It is a figure explaining an example of a decoration special figure start memory display. It is a figure explaining an example of a decoration special figure start memory display. It is a figure explaining an example of a decoration special figure start memory display. It is a figure explaining an example of a decoration special figure start memory display. It is a figure explaining an example of a hold expansion effect. It is a figure explaining an example of a hold expansion effect. It is a figure explaining an example of a hold expansion effect. It is a figure explaining an example of a hold expansion effect. It is a figure explaining an example of a hold expansion effect. It is a figure explaining an example of a hold expansion effect. It is a figure explaining an example of a hold expansion effect. It is a figure explaining an example of a hold expansion effect. It is a figure explaining an example of a hold expansion effect. It is a figure explaining an example of a hold expansion effect. It is a figure explaining an example of a hold expansion effect. It is a figure explaining an example of a hold expansion effect. It is a figure explaining an example of a hold expansion effect.

[First Embodiment]
DESCRIPTION OF EXEMPLARY EMBODIMENTS Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the invention will be described with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram of a gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention.

  The gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment includes a front frame 12, and the front frame 12 is assembled to an outer frame (support frame) 11 via a hinge 13 so as to be capable of opening and closing. The game board 30 (see FIG. 2) is stored in a storage portion (not shown) formed on the front side of the front frame 12. In addition, a glass frame 15 (transparent plate holding frame) provided with a cover glass (transparent member) 14 that covers the front surface of the game board 30 is attached to the front frame (main body frame) 12.

  Further, an illuminating device (moving light) 16 having a built-in lamp and motor and a lamp (LED) 17 for paying out abnormality notification are provided in the upper part of the glass frame 15. Further, on the left and right sides of the glass frame 15, there are provided a frame decoration device 18 with a built-in lamp and the like for emitting light for decoration and production, and a speaker (upper speaker) 19a for emitting sound (for example, sound effects). Yes. Further, a speaker (lower speaker) 19 b is also provided below the front frame 12.

Further, at the lower part of the front frame 12, there is an upper plate 21 (storage tray) for supplying game balls to a not-shown hitting ball launcher, and game balls paid out from a payout unit provided on the back side of the gaming machine 10. There are provided an upper tray ball outlet 22 that flows out, a lower tray (receiving tray) 23 for storing game balls paid out in a state where the upper tray 21 is full, an operation unit 24 of the hitting ball launcher, and the like. Further, an effect operation unit 550 serving as an operation unit that receives an operation input from the player is provided at the upper edge of the upper plate 21. The effect operation unit 550 is an effect button 25 having a built-in effect button switch 25a for receiving a pressing operation input from the player, and the upper surface (press surface) of the effect button 25 is contacted by the player. A touch panel 29 for receiving an operation input is provided. Further, a key 26 for opening and locking the front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 is provided on the lower right side of the front frame 12.
In the present embodiment, the touch panel 29 is provided integrally with the effect button 25, but the touch panel 29 may be separate from the effect button 25. For example, a sub display device is provided in the vicinity of the effect button 25, A touch panel 29 may be provided on the display surface of the sub display device.

  Also, on the front surface of the glass frame 15 above the upper plate 21, a ball lending button 27 that is operated when a player receives a ball lending from an adjacent ball lending machine, and a prepaid card to be discharged from the card unit of the ball lending machine. A discharge button 28 for operating the balance, a balance display section (not shown) for displaying the balance of the prepaid card, and the like are provided. In the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment, the player turns the operation unit 24 so that the ball-striking device feeds the game ball supplied from the upper plate 21 toward the game area 32 on the front surface of the game board 30. Fire. In addition, when the player operates the effect operation unit 550, in the variable display game (decoration special map variable display game) on the display device 41 (see FIG. 2), an effect in which the player's operation is performed is performed. Can do.

  Next, an example of the game board 30 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 30 of the present embodiment.

  On the surface of the game board 30, a substantially circular game area 32 surrounded by the guide rail 31 is formed. The game area 32 is surrounded by resin side cases 33 and guide rails 31 provided at the four corners of the game board 30. In the game area 32, a center case (game production component) 40 provided with a display device 41 is arranged substantially at the center. The display device 41 is attached to a recessed portion provided in the center case 40 at a position deeper than the front surface of the center case 40. That is, the center case 40 surrounds the display area of the display device 41, protrudes forward from the display surface of the display device 41, and is formed so as to make it difficult for a game ball to jump from the surrounding game area 32.

  The display device 41 (variable display device) is configured by a device having a display screen such as an LCD (Liquid Crystal Display) or a CRT (CRT). In an area (display area) where an image of the display screen can be displayed, information relating to a game such as a plurality of identification information (special symbols), a character that produces a special figure variation display game, and a background image that enhances the presentation effect is displayed. . On the display screen of the display device 41, a plurality of special symbols assigned as identification information are variably displayed (variably displayed), and a decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the special diagram variation display game is played. In addition, an image for an effect based on the progress of the game (for example, a jackpot display image, a fanfare display image, an ending display image, etc.) is displayed on the display screen.

  In addition, a board effect device 44 is provided in the upper right part of the center case 40 to perform a game effect by operating. The board effect device 44 includes two arms each having a sub display device 42 attached to a distal end portion thereof, and the sub display device 42 is moved relative to the display device 41 by rotating the arm around the base end portion. Thus, it is possible to convert between a state where they overlap in the front-rear direction and a state where they do not overlap.

On the lower right side of the center case 40 in the game area 32, a normal symbol start gate (common figure start gate) 34 for providing a start condition for the normal figure change display game is provided. The game ball that has won the normal start gate 34 is detected by the gate switch 34a (see FIG. 4).
In the game area 32, three general winning openings 35 are arranged on the lower left side of the center case 40, and one general winning prize is on the lower right side of the center case 40 and below the normal start gate 34. A mouth 35 is arranged. The game balls that have won the general prize opening 35 are detected by a prize opening switch 35a (see FIG. 4).

Also, on the left side of the normal figure start gate 34, there is provided an ordinary variable prize device 37 (start prize opening, start prize area) for giving a start condition for the second special figure fluctuation display game (special figure 2 fluctuation display game). ing.
The normal variation winning device 37 includes a movable member 37b that can be converted into a state in which a game ball can easily flow in by opening in a direction in which the upper end side tilts to the right side, and a partition wall 37d that restricts the flow of the game ball. ing. The movable member 37b normally stands up to maintain a state where the distance from the partition wall 37d is equal to or smaller than the diameter of the game ball, that is, a closed state where the game ball cannot flow (a disadvantageous state for the player). When the result of the normal variation display game becomes a predetermined stop display mode, a game ball is likely to flow into the normal variation prize winning device 37 by a general electric solenoid 37c (see FIG. 4) as a drive device. It can be changed to a state (a state advantageous to the player). The game ball won in the normal variation winning device 37 is detected by the start port 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 4).

Further, a special variable winning device (large winning mouth) 38 that can be converted into a state where a game ball is not accepted and a state where it is easy to accept depending on the result of the special figure changing display game is arranged below the normal variable winning device 37. Yes.
The special variation winning device 38 has an attacker-type open / close door 38c that can be opened by rotating in a direction in which the upper end side is tilted toward the front side, and depending on the result of the special figure variation display game as an auxiliary game. The state is converted from a closed state (closed state unfavorable for the player) to an open state (a state advantageous to the player). That is, the special variable winning device 38 includes, for example, a large winning opening that is opened and closed by an open / close door 38c that is driven by a large winning opening solenoid 38b (see FIG. 4) as a driving device. By converting the closed state from the closed state to the open state, the inflow of game balls into the special winning opening is facilitated, and a predetermined game value (prize ball) is given to the player. Note that a large winning opening switch (count switch) 38a (see FIG. 4) is provided inside the large winning opening (winning area) as detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the large winning opening. . In the gaming machine of this embodiment, two big prize opening switches 38a are provided, and a game ball that has flowed into the big prize opening is detected by any of the big prize opening switches 38a. In this way, by providing a plurality of special winning opening switches 38a, it is possible to quickly detect game balls that have flowed into the special winning opening.

Also, below the center case 40, a first start winning opening 36 (start winning opening, start winning area) and a second special view for giving a start condition for the first special figure fluctuation display game (special figure 1 fluctuation display game). A winning device 90 having a second start winning opening 97 (start winning opening, starting winning area) for providing a start condition for the variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game) is provided.
The winning device 90 includes a distribution member 92 that alternately distributes the game balls flowing into the upper inflow port 90a to the first starting winning port 36 and the second starting winning port 97 (see FIG. 3). A game ball won in the first start winning opening 36 is detected by the start opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 4), and a game ball won in the second start winning opening 97 is in the start opening 3 switch 97a (see FIG. 4). Detected by.
Further, below the winning device 90, there is provided an out port 30a for collecting game balls that have not won the winning port or the like.

FIGS. 3A to 3C are front views of the winning device 90 of the present embodiment, and show a state where the front cover member is removed.
As shown in FIG. 3A, the winning device 90 includes a distribution member 92 at a position directly below the inflow port 90a. A first start winning opening 36 is arranged at the lower left of the sorting member 92, and a second starting winning opening 97 is arranged at the lower right of the distributing member 92.
Further, a front cover member is provided so as to cover the front of the sorting member 92, the first start winning opening 36, and the second starting winning opening 97. The front cover member is transparent or translucent so that the behavior of the game ball in the winning device 90 can be visually recognized.

The distributing member 92 is rotatable about a shaft pin 92a along the front-rear direction, and an upper arm portion 92b extending upward from a position where the shaft pin 92a is disposed and a left arm portion 92c extending leftward. And a right arm portion 92d extending rightward. A left holding portion 92e that temporarily holds a game ball is formed by the upper arm portion 92b and the left arm portion 92c on the left side of the upper arm portion 92b among the three arm portions, and on the right side of the upper arm portion 92b. The upper arm portion 92b and the right arm portion 92d form a right holding portion 92f that temporarily holds a game ball.
As shown in FIG. 3 (b), the sorting member 92 has a position where the left holding portion 92e can receive the game ball that has flowed into the inflow port 90a, with the upper arm portion 92b facing upward, as shown in FIG. As shown in c), the right holding portion 92f can rotate between a position where the game ball that has flowed into the inflow port 90a can be received.

As shown in FIG. 3B, when the left holding portion 92e is in a position where it can receive the game ball that has flowed into the inflow port 90a, the right holding portion 92f moves the game ball toward the second start winning opening 97. It will be in a state where it has flowed down.
In addition, as shown in FIG. 3C, when the right holding portion 92f is in a position where it can accept the game ball that has flowed into the inflow port 90a, the left holding portion 92e plays a game toward the first start winning opening 36. The sphere is made to flow down.

  Moreover, as shown to Fig.3 (a), the distribution member side magnet 96a is attached to the back of the upper arm part 92b among the distribution members 92. FIG. Of the base member 93 to which the sorting member 92 is mounted from the front, the base member side magnet 96b is attached at a position facing the sorting member side magnet 96a when the upper arm portion 92b is vertical. Yes. The distribution member side magnet 96a and the base member side magnet 96b are attached so that the opposite poles are the same, and the upper arm portion 92b of the distribution member 92 is vertical due to the repulsive force of the magnets 96a and 96b. It is urged to rotate to either the left or right without staying in the state. As a result, in a state where the rotation of the sorting member 92 is stopped, either the left holding portion 92e or the right holding portion 92f is in a state where the game ball that has flowed into the inflow port 90a can be received.

  As shown in FIGS. 3B and 3C, the game ball that has flowed into the inflow port 90a is in an acceptable state toward the inflow port 90a of the left holding part 92e and the right holding part 92f. It is held by one holding unit. When the game ball is held by one holding part, the sorting member 92 is rotated in the direction of the one holding part by the weight of the game ball, and the sorting member 92 is rotated by the held game ball. It flows down toward the first start winning opening 36 or the second start winning opening 97 in the direction.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 3B, when the game ball that has flowed in by the left holding portion 92e is received, the sorting member 92 is rotated to the left by the weight of the game ball, and the game ball is moved to the first start winning opening 36. After the guidance, as shown in FIG. 3C, the right holding portion 92f stops in a state where it can accept the next game ball. Then, as shown in FIG. 3C, when the game ball that has flowed in by the right holding portion 92f is received, the sorting member 92 is rotated to the right by the weight of the game ball, and the game ball is moved to the second start winning opening 97. After the guidance, as shown in FIG. 3B, the left holding portion 92e stops in a state where the next game ball can be received.

  The game balls that have flowed down from the holding portions 92e and 92f are likely to flow into the first start winning port 36 or the second starting winning port 97, but may not flow. leak. In particular, if the momentum when flowing into the holding portions 92e and 92f is strong, there is a high possibility that the first starting winning port 36 or the second starting winning port 97 will not flow. In addition, you may comprise so that it may always win in any start winning opening.

  Further, when the sorting member 92 is rotated, the other holding portion that is not the holding portion that holds the game ball is in an acceptable state toward the inflow port 90a. Then, the game ball accepted next time is guided to the winning opening on the other holding unit side. Thereby, the game balls that sequentially flow into the inflow port 90a are alternately distributed to the first start winning port 36 and the second starting winning port 97.

  In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, of the game areas 32 where the game balls flow down, the left area of the center case 40 is the left game area, and the right area of the center case 40 is the right game area. ing. The player can aim to win the winning device 90 by adjusting the firing force and launching the game ball to the left game area (so-called left-handed), and launch the game ball to the right game area (so-called right By hitting), it is possible to aim for winning in the normal start gate 34, the normal variable winning device 37, and the special variable winning device 38.

  In addition, on the outside of the game area 32 (here, in the lower right part of the game board 30), the first special figure fluctuation display game, the second special figure fluctuation display game, and the general figure start gate 34 which form the special figure fluctuation display game are displayed. There is provided a collective display device 50 for displaying a game of variable display with a win as a trigger and displaying various information.

  The collective display device 50 includes a special figure 1 display (first special figure fluctuation display unit) 51a (D1) and a first special figure fluctuation display game composed of a 7-segment type display (LED lamp) and the like. 2 special figure display for 2 special figure fluctuation display game (second special figure fluctuation display part) 51b (D2) and fluctuation display part for general figure fluctuation display game (general figure display) composed of LED lamps 52 (D10, D18) and storage display units 53, 54, 55 (D11 to D16) for notifying the start memory number of each variable display game, which are also configured by LED lamps.

  In addition, the collective display device 50 includes a first game state display unit (first game state display unit, right-handed notification unit) 56 (D8) for notifying that a right-handed game state is more advantageous than a left-handed game. ), A second game state display unit (second game state indicator, time-short state notification unit) 57 (D9) that lights up when the time-short state occurs and notifies the occurrence of the time-short state, the probability of jackpot when the gaming machine 10 is powered on A third game state display unit (third game state display, probability state display unit) 58 (D17) for displaying that the state is in a high probability state, the number of rounds at the big hit (opening and closing of the special variable winning device 38) Round display section 59 (D3 to D7) for displaying the number of times) is provided. The collective display device 50 may be further provided with a display unit (display) that lights up when a big hit occurs and notifies the occurrence of the big hit.

  The special figure fluctuation display game in the special figure 1 display 51a and the special figure 2 display 51b is, for example, during the execution of the fluctuation display game, that is, while the decoration special figure fluctuation display game is being performed on the display device 41, The segment is blinked to indicate that it is changing. In the case of the present embodiment, in the special figure fluctuation display game in the special figure 1 display 51a, in addition to the center segment, the eighth segment provided on the lower right side of the 7-segment is also blinked to change. It is configured to display that it is in the middle so that the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 can be distinguished. When the result of the game is “out of”, as a result mode of out of game, for example, the central segment (in the case of Special Figure 1, the eighth segment on the lower right side) is turned on, and the result of the game is In the case of “winning”, the game results are displayed with the result modes (for example, numbers and symbols) other than the off-result mode as the winning result mode (special result mode) are lit.

The normal display 52 displays the game result as a lighting mode and a lighting color according to the game result after a predetermined time by blinking the lamp during the change and displaying the change.
Further, the general figure hold display 55 displays the start memory number (= holding number) of the general figure start gate 34 which is the variation start condition of the general figure display 52 by turning off, blinking, and turning on a plurality of LEDs.

The special figure 1 hold indicator 53 indicates the number of first start memories (special figure 1 hold) that is the right to execute the first special figure variable display game displayed on the special figure 1 display 51a, and turns off the plurality of LEDs. Displayed by blinking and lighting.
The special figure 2 hold indicator 54 indicates the number of the second start memory (special figure 2 hold) that is the right to execute the second special figure variable display game displayed on the special figure 2 display 51b, and turns off the plurality of LEDs. Display by blinking and lighting.

The first game state display unit (right-handed notification unit) 56 is configured by an LED lamp or the like. In a gaming state (right-handed state) where right-handed is more advantageous than left-handed, the lamp is turned on.
The second game state display unit (short time state notifying unit) 57 is configured by an LED lamp or the like. When the short-time state occurs (during short-time operation), the lamp is turned on.

The third gaming state display unit (probability state display unit) 58 is configured by an LED lamp or the like. For example, when the jackpot probability state is a low probability state (normal probability state) when the gaming machine 10 is turned on, the lamp is turned on. When the gaming machine 10 is turned on, when the jackpot probability state is a high probability state (probability variation state), the lamp is turned on.
The round display unit 59 is configured by an LED lamp or the like, for example, when the special game state based on the big hit is not in effect, the lamp is turned off, and during the special game state, it corresponds to the number of rounds selected according to the special result Set the lamp to light up.

  In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a game is played by launching a game ball (pachinko ball) from a launcher (not shown) toward the game area 32. The launched game balls flow down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by means of direction change members such as obstacle nails and windmills arranged at various locations in the game area 32, and the normal start gate 34 and the general winning opening 35 The first start winning port 36, the second start winning port 97, the normal variation winning device 37 or the special variable winning device 38 are won, or the game region 32 flows into the out port 30a provided at the bottom of the gaming region 32. Discharged from. Then, when a game ball wins the general winning opening 35, the first starting winning opening 36, the second starting winning opening 97, the normal variable winning apparatus 37 or the special variable winning apparatus 38, the number corresponding to the type of the winning opening that has been won The prize ball is discharged from the payout unit controlled by the payout control device 200 (see FIG. 4) to the upper plate 21 or the lower plate 23 of the glass frame 15.

  On the other hand, a gate switch 34a (see FIG. 4) including a non-contact type switch for detecting a game ball that has passed through the general diagram start gate 34 is provided in the general diagram start gate 34. When a game ball that has been driven into the area 32 passes through the usual figure start gate 34, it is detected by the gate switch 34a and a usual figure change display game is played. In addition, the normal variation display game cannot be started, for example, the normal variation display game has already been played and the normal variation display game has not been completed, If 37 is converted to the open state and the game ball passes through the general figure start gate 34, the general figure start memory number is added if the number is less than the upper limit number (for example, four) of the normal figure start memory number (for example, 4). +1), and one ordinary start memory is stored. The number of memorized universal start prizes is displayed on the universal figure hold display 55 of the collective display device 50. In addition, a random number value for hit determination (win random number value) for determining the result of the normal map fluctuation display game is stored in the normal chart start memory, and this random number value for hit determination is determined as a determination value. To determine the result of the normal map display game. When the hit determination random number value matches the determination value, the normal variation display game is won and a specific result mode (normal map specific result) is derived.

  The usual map variation display game is provided in the collective display device 50 and is displayed on a variation display unit (general map display) 52 constituted by LEDs. Makes identification information (general, normal). The general map display 52 is constituted by a display device, and for example, numbers, symbols, character designs, etc. are used as normal identification information. After this is displayed in a variable manner for a predetermined time, the result is displayed in a stopped state. You may do it. If the stop display of the usual figure change display game is a usual figure specifying result, it becomes a hit of the ordinary figure, and the movable member 37b of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened for a predetermined time. This makes it easier for the game ball to win the second start winning opening inside the normal fluctuation winning device 37, and the number of times the second special figure changing display game is executed increases.

  The winning ball to the first starting winning port 36, the winning ball to the second starting winning port 97, and the winning ball to the normal variation winning device 37 are respectively a start port 1 switch 36a and a start port 3 provided therein. It is detected by the switch 97a and the start port 2 switch 37a. The game ball that has won the first start winning opening 36 is detected as a start winning ball of the first special figure variation display game, and is stored as a first start memory up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, four), A game ball won in the second start winning opening 97 or the normal variation winning device 37 is detected as a start winning ball in the second special figure variable display game, and a predetermined upper limit number (for example, four) is limited as the second start memory. Is remembered. Further, when detecting the starting winning ball, a big hit random number value, a big hit symbol random number value, and each variation pattern random number value are extracted as starting storage information, and the extracted random number value is stored in the game control device 100 (see FIG. 4). Are stored in the special figure storage area (a part of the RAM) as a special figure start memory for a predetermined number of times (for example, a maximum of four times). The number stored in the special chart start memory is displayed on the memory display section for notifying the start winning number of the collective display device 50 (the special figure 1 hold display 53, the special figure 2 hold display 54), and the center. Also on the display device 41 of the case 40, it is displayed as a decorative special figure start memory display.

  The game control device 100 is based on the winning to the first starting winning port 36, the second starting winning port 97, or the normal variable winning device 37, or the starting memory thereof, and the special figure 1 display 51a (variable display device). Or the 1st or 2nd special figure fluctuation display game is played with the special figure 2 indicator 51b (variation display device). The first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure fluctuation display game are performed by variably displaying a plurality of special symbols (special figures, identification information) and then stopping and displaying a predetermined result form. In addition, a decorative special figure variation display game is displayed in which a display device (image display device) 41 displays a plurality of types of identification information (for example, numbers, symbols, character designs, etc.) in a variable manner. As a result of the special figure variation display game, when the display form of the special figure 1 display 51a or the special figure 2 display 51b becomes a special result form (special result), a special game state ( So-called big hit state). Correspondingly, the result mode of the decorative special figure variation display game displayed on the display device 41 is also a special result mode.

  For example, in the decorative special symbol variation display game on the display device 41, the decorative special symbol (identification information) composed of the numbers and the like described above on the display device 41 is changed to the left variation display region (first special symbol), the right variation display region ( In each of the second special symbol) and the middle fluctuation display area (third special symbol), each symbol is displayed in a variable manner (high-speed fluctuation) at a speed that is difficult to identify. Then, the symbols that have changed after a predetermined time are sequentially stopped in the order of the left variation display region, the right variation display region, and the middle variation display region, and stopped in each of the left variation display region, the right variation display region, and the middle variation display region. This is done by displaying the result of the special figure variation display game according to the result form constituted by the displayed identification information. In addition, the display device 41 performs a variable display game with a decorative special symbol corresponding to the number of special figure starting memories, and various effect displays such as the appearance of a character are performed to improve interest.

  Note that the special figure 1 display 51a and the special figure 2 display 51b may be separate displays or the same display, but each special figure change display is not performed independently or simultaneously. The game is displayed. In addition, the display device 41 may use different display devices and different display areas in the first special map variable display game and the second special map variable display game, or use the same display device and display area. However, the decoration special figure variation display game is displayed so as not to be executed independently or simultaneously. The game machine 10 may not be provided with the special figure 1 display 51a and the special figure 2 display 51b, and the special figure variation display game may be executed only by the display device 41.

  In addition, the first start winning opening 36 (or the second start winning opening) in a state where the first special figure variation display game (second special figure variation display game) can be started and the start memory number is 0. 97 or the normal variable winning device 37), the start memory is stored as the start right is generated, the start memory number is incremented by 1, and the first characteristic is immediately based on the start memory. A figure change display game (second special figure change display game) is started, and at this time, the start memory number is decremented by one. On the other hand, a state in which the first special figure fluctuation display game (second special figure fluctuation display game) cannot be started immediately, for example, the first or second special figure fluctuation display game has already been performed, and the special figure fluctuation display game has ended. If the game ball is won in the first start winning port 36 (or the second start winning port 97 or the normal variable winning device 37) in a state that is not in a special state or in a special game state, the start memory number is the upper limit number. If it is less, the start memory number is incremented by 1, and one start memory is stored. Then, in a state where the starting memory number becomes 1 or more, a state in which the first special figure fluctuation display game (second special figure fluctuation display game) can be started (the end of the previous special figure fluctuation display game or the special game state) (End), the start memory number is decremented by 1, and the first special figure fluctuation display game (second special figure fluctuation display game) is started based on the stored start memory. In the following description, when the first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure fluctuation display game are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as a special figure fluctuation display game.

  Although not particularly limited, the start port 1 switch 36a in the first start winning port 36, the start port 3 switch 97a in the second start winning port 97, and the start port 2 switch in the normal variation winning device 37 are not limited. The contact switch 37a, the gate switch 34a, the winning opening switch 35a, and the large winning opening switch 38a are provided with a magnetic detection coil, and a non-contact type that detects a game ball using a phenomenon in which a magnetic field changes when a metal comes close to the coil. Magnetic proximity sensors (hereinafter referred to as proximity switches) are used. In addition, the glass frame open detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 and the like of the gaming machine 10 and the body frame open detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (main body frame) 12 and the like include a micro switch having a mechanical contact. Can be used.

FIG. 4 is a block diagram of a control system of the pachinko gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment.
The gaming machine 10 includes a game control device 100. The game control device 100 is a main control device (main board) for comprehensively controlling games, and a gaming microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as a gaming microcomputer) 111 is provided. CPU section 110, input section 120 having an input port, output section 130 having an output port, a driver, etc., CPU section 110, data bus 140 connecting between input section 120 and output section 130, etc. .

  The CPU section 110 includes a game microcomputer (CPU) 111 called an amusement chip (IC) and an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator, and receives a clock that serves as a reference for the CPU operation clock, timer interrupt, and random number generation circuit. An oscillation circuit (crystal oscillator) 113 to be generated is included. The game control device 100 and electronic components such as a solenoid and a motor driven by the game control device 100 are supplied with a predetermined level of DC voltage such as DC32V, DC12V, and DC5V generated by the power supply device 400 so as to be operable. Is done.

  The power supply apparatus 400 includes a normal power supply including an AC-DC converter that generates the DC 32V DC voltage from a 24V AC power source, a DC-DC converter that generates a lower level DC voltage such as DC 12V and DC 5V from the DC 32V voltage, and the like. Unit 410, a backup power supply unit 420 for supplying power supply voltage to the RAM inside the gaming microcomputer 111 in the event of a power failure, and a power failure monitoring circuit, and a power failure monitoring signal for notifying the game control device 100 of the occurrence and recovery of a power failure And a control signal generation unit 430 that generates and outputs a control signal such as a reset signal.

  In this embodiment, the power supply device 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100, but the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are integrated on a separate board or the game control device 100, that is, the main control device 100. You may comprise so that it may provide on a board | substrate. Since the game board 30 and the game control device 100 are to be replaced when the model is changed, the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are provided on a board different from the power supply apparatus 400 or the main board as in the present embodiment. By providing this, it is possible to reduce the cost by removing it from the object of replacement.

  The backup power supply unit 420 can be composed of one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power is supplied to the game microcomputer 111 (particularly, the built-in RAM) of the game control device 100, and the data stored in the RAM is held even during a power failure or after the power is shut off. The control signal generation unit 430 monitors the voltage of 32V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, for example, detects the occurrence of a power failure when the voltage drops below 17V, for example, changes the power failure monitoring signal, and resets the signal after a predetermined time. Is output. In addition, a reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from the time when the power is turned on or the power is restored.

  Further, the game control device 100 is provided with a RAM initialization switch 112. When this RAM initialization switch 112 is operated, an initialization switch signal is generated, and based on this, information stored in the RAM 111C in the gaming microcomputer 111 and the RAM in the payout control device 200 is forcibly initialized. Processing is performed. Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 111. The reset signal is a kind of forced interrupt signal and resets the entire control system.

  The gaming microcomputer 111 includes a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111A, a read-only ROM (read-only memory) 111B, and a RAM (random access memory) 111C that can be read and written as needed.

  The ROM 111B stores invariant information (programs, fixed data, various random number judgment values, etc.) for game control in a nonvolatile manner, and the RAM 111C stores a work area for the CPU 111A and various signals and random number values during game control. Used as As the ROM 111B or the RAM 111C, an electrically rewritable nonvolatile memory such as an EEPROM may be used.

  In addition, the ROM 111B stores, for example, a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines the execution time of the special figure variation display game, the contents of the effects, the presence or absence of the reach state, and the like. The variation pattern table is a table for the CPU 111A to determine the variation pattern by referring to the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 stored as the start memory. The variation pattern table includes a loss variation pattern table selected when the result is lost, a jackpot variation pattern table selected when the result is a big hit, and the like.

  Here, the reach (reach state) has a display device whose display state can be changed, the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are predetermined. In the gaming machine 10 in which the gaming state becomes a gaming state advantageous to the player (special gaming state) when the special result mode is entered, the game is already derived at the stage where some of the plurality of display results are not yet derived and displayed. This means a display state in which the displayed display result satisfies the condition for the special result mode. In other words, the reach state is deviated from the display condition that is the special result mode even when the display device's variable display control progresses and reaches the stage before the display result is derived and displayed. There is no display mode. For example, a state where so-called full-rotation reach is performed in a variable display region while maintaining a state in which special result modes are aligned (so-called full rotation reach) is also included in the reach state. The reach state is a display state at the time when the display control of the display device has progressed to reach a stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. The display state in the case where at least a part of the display results of the plurality of variable display areas satisfies the condition for the special result mode.

  Thus, for example, a decorative special figure fluctuation display game displayed on a display device corresponding to a special figure fluctuation display game fluctuates a plurality of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle, and right fluctuation display areas on the display device. After displaying, when the display of the result mode is stopped in the order of left, right, and middle, the condition that becomes the special result mode is satisfied in the left and right variable display areas (for example, The state in which the variable display is stopped with the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition to this, when the variable display of all the variable display areas is temporarily stopped, the condition that the special result mode is satisfied in any two of the left, middle, and right variable display areas (for example, the same The state in which the identification information is obtained (except for the special result mode) may be set as the reach state, and the remaining one variable display area may be variably displayed from the reach state.

  This reach state includes a plurality of reach effects, and the possibility of deriving a special result mode is different (expectation value is different). As a reach effect, normal reach (N reach), special 1 reach (SP1 reach), Special 2 reach (SP2 reach) and special 3 reach (SP3 reach) are set. The expected value increases in the order of no reach <normal reach <special 1 reach <special 2 reach <special 3 reach. In addition, this reach state is included in a variable display mode at least in a case where a special result mode is derived in a special figure variable display game (when a big hit is achieved). That is, it may be included in the variable display mode in the case where it is determined that the special result mode is not derived in the special figure variable display game (when it is out of date). Therefore, the state in which the reach state has occurred is a state that is more likely to be a big hit than the case in which the reach state does not occur.

  The CPU 111A executes a game control program in the ROM 111B, generates control signals (commands) for the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300, and generates and outputs drive signals for the solenoid and the display device, thereby playing the gaming machine. 10 overall control is performed. Although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 is a jackpot random number for determining the hit of the special figure variation display game, a big hit symbol random number for determining the big hit symbol, a variation pattern in the special figure fluctuation display game (various patterns Random number generation circuit for generating fluctuation pattern random numbers for determining the fluctuation pattern game execution time in the variable display of reach and non-reach fluctuation display, and hit random numbers for determining the hit of the usual variable display game And a clock generator for generating a clock that gives a timer interrupt signal with a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 111A and an update timing of the random number generation circuit based on an oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113. Yes.

  Further, the CPU 111A acquires any one variation pattern table from among a plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B in the process related to the special figure variation display game. Specifically, the CPU 111A determines the game result (big hit or miss) of the special figure fluctuation display game, the probability state (normal probability state or high probability state) of the special figure fluctuation display game as the current game state, and the current game. Based on the operating state (short-time operating state (normal power support state)) of the normal variation winning device 37 as a state, the starting memory number, etc., one of the variation pattern tables is selected from a plurality of variation pattern tables. Get. Here, when executing the special figure variation display game, the CPU 111A serves as variation distribution information acquisition means for acquiring any one variation pattern table among the plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B.

  The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, an input interface, an output interface, and the like, and drives a payout motor of the payout unit in accordance with a prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100, thereby Control to make it pay out. In addition, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor of the payout unit based on the ball rental request signal from the card unit, and performs control for paying out the ball.

  The input unit 120 of the gaming microcomputer 111 includes a panel radio wave sensor 62 that detects the emission of radio waves to the gaming machine, a starting port 1 switch 36 a in the first starting winning award port 36, and a starting port 2 switch in the normal variation winning device 37. 37a, a start port 3 switch 97a in the second start winning port 97, a gate switch 34a in the usual start gate 34, a winning port switch 35a, and a large winning port switch 38a of the special variable winning device 38, these switches Is provided with an interface chip (proximity I / F) 121 that receives a negative logic signal such as a high level of 11V and a low level of 7V supplied from the terminal and converts it to a positive logic signal of 0V-5V. The proximity I / F 121 has an input range of 7V-11V, so that the lead wire of the sensor or proximity switch is improperly shorted, the sensor or switch is disconnected from the connector, or the lead wire is disconnected to float. It is possible to detect an abnormal state such as, and output an abnormality detection signal.

  The output of the proximity I / F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123 or the third input port 124 and read into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. Of the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signal of the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, the start port 3 switch 97a, the gate switch 34a, the winning port switch 35a and the big winning port switch 38a is the second input. Input to port 123. Of the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signal of the panel radio wave sensor 62 and the abnormality detection signal output when the abnormality of the sensor or the switch is detected are input to the third input port 124. Further, the third input port 124 has a detection signal from the fraud detection magnetic sensor 61 provided on the front frame 12 of the gaming machine 10 or a glass frame open detection provided on the glass frame 15 of the gaming machine 10. The detection signal of the switch 63 and the detection signal of the main body frame opening detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (main body frame) 12 of the gaming machine 10 are also input. Note that a vibration sensor switch for detecting vibration may be provided in the gaming machine, and the detection signal may be input to the third input port 124.

  Of the outputs from the proximity I / F 121, the output to the second input port 123 is also supplied from the main board 100 to the test test apparatus (not shown) via the relay board 70. Further, the detection signals of the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, and the start port 3 switch 97a among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121 are input to the gaming microcomputer 111 in addition to the second input port 123. It is configured.

  As described above, the proximity I / F 121 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, the proximity I / F 121 is supplied with a voltage of 12 V from the power supply device 400 in addition to a voltage such as 5 V required for normal IC operation. It has become.

  The data held by the second input port 123 is read by asserting the enable signal CE2 (changing to an effective level) by decoding the address assigned to the second input port 123 by the gaming microcomputer 111. be able to. The same applies to the third input port 124 and the first input port 122 described later.

  The input unit 120 also includes a fraud radio signal from the payout control device 200 (a signal output when the frame radio wave sensor provided on the front frame 12 detects radio waves), a payout busy signal (payout control device). 200 is a signal indicating whether or not a command can be received), a payout abnormality status signal (status signal indicating a payout abnormality), a shot ball cut switch signal (a signal indicating a lack of game balls before payout), an overflow switch signal (A signal output when it is detected that a predetermined amount or more of game balls are stored in the lower plate 23 (full), a touch switch signal (input to a touch switch provided on the operation unit 24) A first input port 122 is provided which takes in a signal based on the data bus 140 and supplies the signal to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140.

  Further, the input unit 120 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 125 for inputting a signal such as a power failure monitoring signal or a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the gaming microcomputer 111 or the like. The Schmitt buffer 125 receives these input signals. It has a function to remove noise from. The power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 400 and the initialization switch signal from the RAM initialization switch 112 are once input to the first input port 122 and taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. That is, it is treated as a signal equivalent to the signal from the various switches described above. This is because the number of terminals receiving external signals provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 is limited.

  On the other hand, the reset signal RESET from which noise has been removed by the Schmitt buffer 125 is directly input to a reset terminal provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 and also supplied to each port of the output unit 130. Further, the reset signal RESET is directly output to the relay board 70 without going through the output unit 130, thereby turning off the test test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 for output to the test board. It is configured as follows. Further, the reset signal RESET may be configured to be output to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70. The reset signal RESET is not supplied to each port 122, 123, 124 of the input unit 120. Data set in each port of the output unit 130 by the gaming microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RESET is input needs to be reset in order to prevent malfunction of the system. This is because the data read by the gaming microcomputer 111 from the port is discarded when the gaming microcomputer 111 is reset.

  The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 132 disposed on a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the effect control apparatus 300 and a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the payout control apparatus 200. Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. The one-way communication is such that no signal can be input to the game control device 100 from the side of the effect control device 300.

  In addition, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 via a relay board 70 for data indicating special symbol information of the variable display game to a test firing test apparatus of an accredited organization (not shown) and a signal indicating the probability status of jackpot. The output buffer 133 is configured to be mountable. The buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on a game control device (main board) of a pachinko gaming machine as an actual machine (a mass-produced product) installed in the game shop. A detection signal output from the proximity I / F 121, such as a start port switch, that is not required to be processed is supplied to the test test apparatus via the relay board 70 without passing through the buffer 133.

  On the other hand, detection signals that cannot be supplied to the test firing test apparatus as they are, such as the magnetic sensor 61 and the panel radio wave sensor 62, are once taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information, for example, the gaming machine controls the game. An error signal indicating that the state is not possible is supplied from the data bus 140 to the trial test apparatus via the buffer 133 and the relay board 70. The relay board 70 is provided with a port that takes in the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplies it to the test test apparatus, a connector that relays and transmits the signal line of the detection signal of the switch that does not pass through the buffer, and the like. ing. A chip enable signal CE output from the gaming microcomputer 111 is also supplied to the port on the relay board 70, and the signal of the port selected and controlled by the signal CE is supplied to the test firing test apparatus.

  Further, the output unit 130 includes a solenoid (large winning port solenoid) 38b connected to the data bus 140 for opening the special variable winning device 38 and a solenoid (general power solenoid) 37c for opening the movable member 37b of the normal variable winning device 37. A second output port 134 is provided for outputting the opening / closing data. In addition, the output unit 130 includes a third output port 135 for outputting ON / OFF data of the segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the contents displayed on the collective display device 50, and the collective display device 50. A fourth output port 136 is provided for outputting on / off data of the digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED is connected.

  The output unit 130 is provided with a fifth output port 137 for outputting information related to the gaming machine 10 such as jackpot information to the external information terminal board 71. The external information terminal board 71 is provided with a photo relay, which can be connected to, for example, an external device (such as an information collection terminal or a game hall internal management device (hall computer)) installed in a game store, and stores information about the gaming machine 10. It can be supplied to an external device. Further, a launch permission signal is also output from the fifth output port 137 to the payout control device 200 via the Schmitt buffer 132.

  Further, the output unit 130 receives a switching data signal of the special prize opening solenoid 38b and the general power solenoid 37c output from the second output port 134, and generates and outputs a solenoid driving signal 138a. The second driver 138b for outputting the ON / OFF drive signal of the segment line on the current supply side of the collective display device 50 output from the third output port 135, and the current of the collective display device 50 output from the fourth output port 136 A third driver 138c that outputs an on / off drive signal for the lead-in digit line, and a fourth driver 138d that outputs an external information signal supplied from the fifth output port 137 to an external device such as a management device to the external information terminal board 71 Is provided.

  The first driver 138a is supplied with DC32V from the power supply device 400 as a power supply voltage so that a solenoid operating at 32V can be driven. Also, DC12V is supplied to the second driver 138b that drives the segment lines of the collective display device 50. Since the third driver 138c for driving the digit line is for drawing out the digit line corresponding to the display data with a current, the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V.

  A dynamic drive method is achieved by flowing a current to the anode terminal of the LED through the segment line by the second driver 138b that outputs 12V, and drawing the current through the segment line from the cathode terminal by the third driver 138c that outputs the ground potential. The power supply voltage flows through the LEDs sequentially selected in step 1 so that the LEDs are lit. The fourth driver 138d that outputs the external information signal to the external information terminal board 71 is supplied with DC12V in order to give the external information signal a level of 12V. Note that the buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 138a, and the like may be provided on the output board 130 of the game control apparatus 100, that is, on the relay board 70 side instead of the main board.

  Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as an identification code and a program of each gaming machine to the external inspection device 500. The photocoupler 139 is configured to be capable of two-way communication so that the gaming microcomputer 111 can transmit and receive data to and from the inspection device 500 through serial communication. Note that such data transmission / reception is performed using a serial communication terminal included in the gaming microcomputer 111 in the same manner as a normal general-purpose microprocessor, and thus ports such as the input ports 122, 123, and 124 are not provided.

Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 will be described with reference to FIG.
The effect control device 300 is for displaying video on the display device 41 in accordance with commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311 and the main control microcomputer 311, similarly to the game microcomputer 111. A VDP (Video Display Processor) 312 as a graphic processor for performing the image processing, and a sound source LSI 314 for controlling output of sound for reproducing various melody and sound effects from the speakers 19a and 19b.

  The main control microcomputer 311 stores a program ROM 321 composed of a PROM (programmable read only memory) storing a program executed by the CPU and various data, a RAM 322 providing a work area, and stored contents even when power is not supplied in the event of a power failure. An FeRAM 323 that can be held is connected to an RTC (real-time clock) 338 that serves as a clock means for generating information indicating the current date and time (year, month, day of the week, time, etc.). A RAM for providing a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311. A WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311. The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes the command from the game microcomputer 111, decides the contents of the presentation and instructs the contents of the output video to the VDP 312, instructs the sound source LSI 314 to reproduce the sound, lights the decoration lamp, motors And control of solenoid drive control and production time management.

  The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a for providing a work area and a scaler 312b for enlarging and reducing images. The VDP 312 has an image ROM 325 in which character images and video data are stored, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM (video RAM) used to develop and process image data such as characters read from the image ROM 325. ) 326 is connected.

  Although not particularly limited, the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 are configured to transmit and receive data in a parallel manner. By transmitting and receiving data in parallel, commands and data can be transmitted in a shorter time than in the case of serial.

  From the VDP 312 to the main control microcomputer 311, a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC for synchronizing the video of the display device 41 and lighting of the decoration lamps provided on the glass frame 15 and the game board 30, and a synchronization signal for giving data transmission timing STS is input. The VDP 312 informs the main control microcomputer 311 that it is waiting to receive commands and data from the interrupt control signals INT0 to n and the main control microcomputer 311 in order to notify the processing status such as the end of drawing in the VRAM. A wait signal WAIT and the like are also input.

  The effect control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 by an LVDS (small amplitude signal transmission) method. Video data, horizontal synchronization signal HSYNC, and vertical synchronization signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313, and the video generated by the VDP 312 is input to the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313. Is displayed.

  A sound ROM 327 storing sound data is connected to the sound source LSI 314. The main control microcomputer 311 and the tone generator LSI 314 are connected via an address / data bus 340. An interrupt signal INT is input from the tone generator LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311. The effect control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier that drives an upper speaker 19 a provided on the glass frame 15 and a lower speaker 19 b provided on the front frame 12. The generated sound is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b via the amplifier circuit 337.

  In addition, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I / F) 331 that receives a command transmitted from the game control device 100. An ornamental special figure holding number command, a decorative special figure command, a variation command, a stop information command, etc. transmitted from the game control device 100 to the production control device 300 via this command I / F 331 are produced as a production control command signal (production command ). Since the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 operates at DC 5V and the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC 3.3V, the command I / F 331 is provided with a signal level conversion function. Yes.

  The effect control device 300 includes a board decoration LED control circuit 332 for driving and controlling a board decoration device 46 having LEDs (light emitting diodes) provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40), and a glass frame 15. A board provided in a frame decoration LED control circuit 333 for driving and controlling a frame decoration device (for example, the frame decoration device 18 etc.) having an LED (light emitting diode) provided, and a game board 30 (including the center case 40). A board effect movable body control circuit 334 that drives and controls the effect device 44 (for example, a movable accessory that enhances the effect of the effect in cooperation with the effect display on the display device 41) is provided. These control circuits 332 to 334 that drive and control lamps, motors, solenoids, and the like are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via an address / data bus 340. The glass frame 15 is provided with a frame effect device provided with a drive source such as a motor (for example, a motor for operating a device for effect), and a frame effect movable body control circuit for driving and controlling the frame effect device is provided. Also good.

  Further, the effect control device 300 includes an effect button switch 25 a built in the effect button 25 provided on the glass frame 15, a touch panel 29 provided on the glass frame 15, an initial position of a motor in the board effect device 44, and the like. The function of detecting the on / off state of the effect actor switch 47 (effect motor switch) for detecting the sound and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 and the state of the volume control switch 335 provided in the effect control device 300 And a switch input circuit 336 for inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 is provided.

  The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply apparatus 400 drives a motor or a solenoid to supply a desired level of DC voltage to the effect control apparatus 300 having the above-described configuration and electronic components controlled thereby. In addition to DC32V, display device 41 consisting of a liquid crystal panel, DC12V for driving motors and LEDs, and DC5V as the power supply voltage for command I / F 331, a voltage of DC15V for driving motors, LEDs, and speakers is generated. Is configured to do. Further, when an LSI operating at a low voltage such as 3.3 V or 1.2 V is used as the main control microcomputer 311, a DC − for generating DC 3.3 V or DC 1.2 V based on DC 5 V is used. A DC converter is provided in the effect control device 300. The DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply unit 410.

  The reset signal generated by the control signal generation unit 430 of the power supply apparatus 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 to put the device into a reset state. In addition, VDP 312 (VDRESET signal), sound source LSI 314, amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal) for driving speakers, and control circuits 332 to 334 (IORESET) for driving and controlling lamps and motors, etc., are output from main control microcomputer 311. Signal) to reset them. In addition, a cooling FAN 45 that cools various parts of the gaming machine 10 is connected to the effect control device 300, and the cooling FAN 45 is driven in a state in which the power of the effect control device 300 is turned on.

Next, game control performed in these control circuits will be described.
The CPU 111A of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 extracts a random number value for hit determination of the normal figure based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the gate switch 34a provided to the normal figure start gate 34, and the ROM 111B. Is compared with the determination value stored in the table, and a process of determining a missed hit of the normal game display game is performed. Then, after the identification symbol (identification information) is variably displayed for a predetermined time on the common symbol display 52, a process for displaying a common symbol variation display game to be stopped is performed. When the result of this normal map change display game is a win, a special result mode corresponding to each of the first stop symbol to the third stop symbol is displayed on the general symbol display 52, and the general electric solenoid 37c is displayed. Control is performed to open the movable member 37b of the normal variation winning device 37 as described above for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds or 1.7 seconds). That is, the game control device 100 serves as conversion control execution means for performing conversion control of the conversion member (movable member 37b). In addition, when the result of the normal map change display game is out of order, control is performed to display the result form of the shift on the general map display 52.

  Further, based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the start port 1 switch 36a provided in the first start winning port 36, the start winning (starting memory) is stored, and based on this starting memory, the first special figure fluctuation display is stored. A game jackpot determination random number value is extracted and compared with a determination value stored in the ROM 111B, and a process of determining a miss of the first special figure variation display game is performed. Further, the start memory is stored based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the start port 2 switch 37a provided in the normal variation winning device 37 and the start port 3 switch 97a provided in the second start winning port 97. Based on the starting memory, the random number value for determining the big hit of the second special figure variation display game is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111B, and the process of determining the hit difference of the second special figure fluctuation display game is performed. .

  Then, the CPU 111 </ b> A of the game control device 100 outputs a control signal (effect control command) including the determination results of the first special figure variation display game and the second special figure variation display game to the effect control device 300. Then, after the identification symbol (identification information) is variably displayed on the special figure 1 display 51a and the special figure 2 display 51b for a predetermined time, a special figure variation display game to be stopped is displayed. In other words, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the variable display game is based on winning in the starting winning area (the first starting winning port 36, the second starting winning port 97, the normal variable winning device 37) of the game balls flowing down the game area 32. It constitutes a game control means for controlling the progress.

  In addition, in the production control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, the display device 41 performs a process of displaying a decoration special figure fluctuation display game corresponding to the special figure fluctuation display game. Furthermore, in the production control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, the production state setting, the sound output from the speakers 19a and 19b, the process of controlling the light emission of various LEDs, and the like are performed. That is, the production control device 300 serves as production control means for controlling production related to a game (such as a variable display game).

  Then, when the result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 displays the special result mode on the special figure 1 display 51a and the special figure 2 display 51b and generates a special gaming state. To perform the process. In the process of generating the special game state, the CPU 111A performs control for allowing the game ball to flow into the special winning opening by, for example, opening the open / close door 38c of the special variable winning apparatus 38 by the special winning opening solenoid 38b. . Then, until the condition that either a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls wins the grand prize opening or a predetermined openable time elapses from the opening of the big prize opening is achieved. A control (cycle game) is performed in which the release is set as one round, and this is continued (repeated) a predetermined number of rounds. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a special winning opening / closing control means for performing control for opening / closing the special winning opening when the stop result mode becomes the special result mode. Further, when the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is out of order, the special figure 1 display 51a and the special figure 2 display 51b are controlled to display the result form of the deviation.

  In addition, the game control device 100 can generate a high probability state as a gaming state after the special gaming state ends based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. This high probability state is a state in which the probability of a hit result in the special figure variation display game is higher than the normal probability state (low probability state). Moreover, even if it becomes a high probability state based on the result aspect of any of the first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure fluctuation display game, the first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure Both of the variable display games are in a high probability state.

  In addition, the game control device 100 can generate a short-time state (also called a high-probability state or a general power support state) as a game state after the special game state ends, based on the result form of the special figure variation display game. ing. At this time, in the short state, the probability (probability per ordinary figure) that is the hit result of the ordinary map change display game is set to a high probability (ordinary figure high probability state) higher than 0 that is the normal probability (ordinary figure low probability state). It is possible. As a result, control is performed so that the opening time of the normal variation winning device 37 per unit time is longer than when the normal variation winning device 37 is in the normal low probability state.

  In addition, the execution time of the general map variable display game, the general map stop time, the number of general power releases, and the general power open time are appropriately set so as to control the normal map variable display game and the normal variable winning device 37 to be in the short-time operation state. For example, in the short-time state, it is possible to control the execution time of the above-described normal variation display game (ordinary variation time) to be the second variation display time shorter than the first variation display time. (For example, 10,000 milliseconds is 1000 milliseconds). Further, in the short time state, it is possible to control the normal map stop time for displaying the result of the normal map change display game to be the second stop time shorter than the first stop time (for example, 1604 milliseconds). 704 ms). Also, in the short-time state, when the normal variation winning game 37 is released as a result of the normal-variation display game being won, the opening time (general power open time) is set to the normal state (low-probability state) It is possible to control so that the second opening time is longer than one opening time (for example, 100 msec is 1352 msec). In the short-time state, the number of times of opening of the normal variation winning device 37 (the number of times of normal power release) is greater than the number of times of opening the first time (for example, 2 times) with respect to the result of one hit of the normal fluctuation display game. It is possible to set the number of times of opening (for example, 4 times) to the second opening number. Further, in the short-time state, the probability that the hit result of the normal map variation display game (probability per normal map) is higher than the normal probability (normal low probability state, for example, 0/251) in the normal operation state. High probability (usually high probability state, eg 250/251) is possible.

  In the short-time state, the normal variation winning device 37 is set to the open state by changing any one or more of the normal time fluctuation time, the normal time stop time, the number of normal power releases, the normal power release time, and the probability per normal time. Extend the time to change state more than usual. It is also possible to set a plurality of types of time-short states that are different from each other. Moreover, when it is a hit, either the first opening mode or the second opening mode may be selected. In this case, the selection probabilities of the first release mode and the second release mode may be different. Further, the high probability state and the short time state can be generated independently, and both can be generated simultaneously or only one can be generated.

  Hereinafter, control of the gaming machine that performs such a game will be described. First, the control executed by the game microcomputer (game microcomputer) 111 of the game control device 100 will be described. Control processing by the gaming microcomputer 111 mainly includes main processing shown in FIGS. 6 and 7 and timer interruption processing shown in FIG. 9 performed at a predetermined time period (for example, 4 milliseconds).

[Main processing]
First, the main process will be described. The main process is started when the power is turned on. In this main process, as shown in FIGS. 6 and 7, first, the process of prohibiting the interrupt (step S1) is performed, and then the start address of the area in which the value of the register or the like is saved when the interrupt occurs. A stack pointer setting process (step S2) for setting a certain stack pointer is performed. Next, register bank 0 is designated (step S3), and the upper address of the RAM top address is set in a predetermined register (for example, D register) (step S4). In the case of the present embodiment, the RAM address range is 0000h to 01FFh, the upper order is 00h or 01h, and the top 00h is set in step S4. Next, a firing stop signal is output to set the firing permission signal to a prohibited state (step S5). The launch permission signal is set to a prohibited state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a firing stop signal, and the launch of the game ball is prohibited.

  Thereafter, the state of the input port 1 (first input port 122) is read (step S6), and processing for setting a power-on delay timer is performed (step S7). In this process, by setting a predetermined initial value, a program of slave control means (for example, payout control apparatus 200 or effect control apparatus 300) that performs various controls in accordance with instructions from the game control apparatus 100 serving as the main control means. A waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) for waiting for normal startup is set. As a result, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 is first started up, and the command is sent to the slave control device before the slave control device (for example, the payout control device 200 or the production control device 300) is started. The device can avoid missing commands. That is, the game control device 100 delays the start of the main control means (game control device 100) and waits for the start of the slave control devices (the payout control device 200, the effect control device 300, etc.) when the power is turned on. A standby means for setting the standby time is provided.

  Further, the power-on delay timer is measured using a storage area (a RAM area or a register that is not subject to validity determination) that is not a target for RAM validity determination (checksum calculation). Thereby, when calculating check data such as the checksum of the RAM area, it is not necessary to exclude a part of the RAM area, so that it is possible to prevent the control at power-on from becoming complicated.

  Note that an initialization switch signal is input to the first input port 122, and the operation of the initialization switch 112 is reliably performed by reading the state of the first input port 122 before the start of the standby time. It can be detected. In other words, if the state of the initialization switch 112 is read after the standby time has elapsed, the initialization switch 112 is operated after waiting for the standby time to elapse, or the initialization switch 112 is operated from when the power is turned on until the standby time elapses. It is necessary to continue doing. However, by reading the status before the start of the standby time, it can be detected by operating immediately after turning on the power without performing such troublesome operations. Can be prevented from being accepted.

  After performing the process of setting the power-on delay timer (step S7), the process of measuring the standby time and monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the standby time (steps S8 to S12) is performed. First, the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 is read via the port and the data bus and the number of times (for example, twice) to check is set (step S8), and it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is on. Is performed (step S9).

  If the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S9; Y), it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is on for the number of checks set in step S8 (step S10). If the power failure monitoring signal is not on for the number of checks (step S10; N), the process returns to the determination of whether the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S9). If the power failure monitoring signal is kept on for the number of checks (step S10; Y), that is, if it is determined that a power failure has occurred, the power supply of the gaming machine is waited to be cut off. In this way, it is possible to prevent a power outage from being erroneously detected due to noise, etc. by determining that a power outage has occurred when the power outage monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period of time, and appropriately deal with problems at power-on. can do.

  That is, the game control device 100 serves as a power failure monitoring means for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during a predetermined standby time. As a result, it is possible to cope with a power failure that occurs during the period in which the activation of the game control device 100 that constitutes the main control means is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately deal with a problem at the time of power-on. Note that access to the RAM is not permitted until the end of the standby time, and the stored contents at the time of the previous power shut-off are retained, so backup processing is performed when a power failure occurs here There is no need. For this reason, even if a power failure occurs during the standby time, it is not necessary to back up the RAM, and the control burden can be reduced.

  On the other hand, when the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step S9; N), that is, when a power failure has not occurred, the power-on delay timer is updated by -1 (step S11), and the timer value is 0? Is determined (step S12). If the value of the timer is not 0 (step S12; N), that is, if the standby time has not ended, the process returns to the process of setting the number of checks of the power failure monitoring signal (step S8). If the value of the timer is 0 (step S12; Y), that is, if the standby time has expired, access to a readable / writable RWM (read / write memory) such as a RAM or EEPROM is permitted (step S13). ), Off-data is output to all output ports (set to a state in which there is no output) (step S14).

  Next, a serial port (a port pre-installed in the gaming microcomputer 111 and used in this embodiment for communication with the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200) is set (step S15) and read first. It is determined from the state of the input port 1 (first input port 122) whether the initialization switch has been turned on (step S16).

  When the initialization switch is OFF (step S16; N), it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is normal power interruption inspection area check data 1 (for example, 5 Ah) (step S17). If it is normal (step S17; Y), it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection area 2 in the RWM is normal power interruption inspection area check data 2 (for example, A5h) (step S18). If the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (step S18; Y), a checksum calculation process for calculating a checksum of a predetermined area in the RWM is performed (step S19). It is determined whether or not the checksums match (step S20). If the checksums match (step S20; Y), the process proceeds to step S21 in FIG.

  Further, when it is determined that the initialization switch is on (step S16; Y), or when it is determined that the power failure inspection area value is not normal power failure inspection area check data (step S17; N or step S18). N), when it is determined that the checksums do not match (step S20; N), the process proceeds to step S26 in FIG. 7 to perform initialization processing. That is, the initialization switch forms an initialization operation unit that can be operated from the outside, and the game control device 100 initializes data stored in the RAM based on the operation of the initialization operation unit. Make.

  In step S21 of FIG. 7, the initial value at the time of power failure recovery is saved in the area to be initialized (step S21). The areas to be initialized here are a power failure inspection area, a checksum area, and an area related to error fraud monitoring. The busy signal status area for storing the state of the payout busy signal, which is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can accept the command, is also cleared, indicating that the state of the payout busy signal has not been determined. Undefined state. Similarly, the touch switch signal state monitoring area for storing the state of the touch switch signal is also cleared, and an undefined state indicating that the state of the touch switch signal has not been determined. Thereafter, an area for storing the game state in the RWM is examined to determine whether or not the probability state of the special figure variation display game is a high probability state (step S22). Here, when the special figure is not in high probability (step S22; N), steps S23 and S24 are skipped and the process proceeds to step S25. Further, when the special figure is in high probability (step S22; Y), the on-information is saved in the high probability notification flag area (step S23), and the high probability notification LED (error indicator) provided on the game board 30 is saved. ON (lighting) data is saved in the segment area (step S24). And the command at the time of the power failure restoration corresponding to the process number prepared in order to perform the special figure game process mentioned later reasonably is transmitted to an effect control board (effect control apparatus 300) (step S25), and step S31 Proceed to In the case of the present embodiment, in step S25, a model designation command, a special figure 1 hold number command, a special figure 2 hold number command, a probability information command, a screen designation command (a customer waiting demonstration screen command if waiting for a customer, otherwise) If so, send multiple commands such as recovery screen commands).

  On the other hand, when jumping from step S16, S17, S18, S20 to step S26, the RAM access prohibited area is set to access permitted (step S26), and all the areas including the busy signal status area and the touch switch signal state monitoring area are set. The RAM area is cleared to 0 (step S27), and the RAM access prohibition area is set to access prohibition (step S28). Then, the initial value at the time of RAM initialization is saved in the area to be initialized (step S29). The area to be initialized here is an area relating to the setting of the customer waiting demonstration area and the production mode. And the command at the time of RAM initialization is transmitted to an effect control board (effect control apparatus 300) (step S30), and it progresses to step S31. In this embodiment, in step S30, a model designation command, a special figure 1 hold number command, a special figure 2 hold number command, a probability information command, a RAM initialization command (a customer waiting demonstration screen is displayed and a predetermined time ( For example, a plurality of commands such as a command for informing the RAM initialization with light and sound for 30 seconds) are transmitted.

  In step S31, a process of starting a CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit) circuit that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) in the gaming microcomputer 111 (clock generator) is performed. The CTC circuit is provided in a clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 111. The clock generator divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113, and a timer interrupt signal having a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 111A based on the divided signal. And a CTC circuit for generating a signal CTC that gives a trigger for updating a random number to be supplied to the random number generation circuit.

  After the CTC activation process in step S31, a process for activating and setting the random number generation circuit is performed (step S32). Specifically, the CPU 111A performs setting of a code (specified value) for starting the random number generation circuit in a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit. Also, a bit transposition pattern of a hard random number (here, a big hit random number) generated by the hardware of the random number generation circuit is set. Bit transposition pattern is a method of permutation when the extracted random bit arrangement (the arrangement before the upper bit transposition) is replaced in a predetermined order and stored as a different bit arrangement (the arrangement after the lower bit transposition). It is a pattern that defines By replacing the bits of the random number according to this bit transposition pattern, the regularity of the random number can be broken and the confidentiality of the random number can be improved. The bit transposition pattern may be a fixed single pattern or may be selected from a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. Further, the user may arbitrarily set it.

  Thereafter, the value of a predetermined register (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit at the time of power-on is extracted, and various corresponding initial value random numbers (in the case of this embodiment, random numbers that determine the hit pattern of the special figure) Save in the specified area of the RWM as the initial value (start value) of (big hit symbol random number), random number to determine the hit of the normal figure (per random number), random number to determine the hit symbol of the normal figure (per hit design random number) From (step S33), the interruption is permitted (step S34). The random number generation circuit in the CPU 111A used in this embodiment is configured so that the initial value of the soft random number register changes every time the power is turned on. Therefore, this value is used as the initial value (start value) of various initial value random numbers. By doing so, it is possible to break the regularity of random numbers generated by software, making it difficult for a player to obtain illegal random numbers.

  Subsequently, an initial value random number update process (step S35) is performed for updating the values of various initial value random numbers and breaking the regularity of the random numbers. Although not particularly limited, in this embodiment, the big hit random number, the big hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number are configured to be generated using random numbers generated in the random number generation circuit. Yes. However, the big hit random number is a so-called “high-speed counter” that is updated based on a clock with a speed equal to or higher than the CPU operating clock. The big hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number are timer interrupts that are processing units of the program. This is a “low-speed counter” that is updated based on the CTC output (CTC (CTC2) different from CTC (CTC0) of the timer interrupt process) that has the same cycle as the processing. In addition, the big hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number adopt a so-called “initial value change method” in which the start value is changed by using each initial value random number (generated by software) every time the random number makes a round. Yes. Each random number may be a counter update by +1 or −1, or may be a random update in which all values within the range appear without overlapping until one round is reached. That is, the big hit random number is a random number that is updated only by hardware, and the big hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number are random numbers that are updated by hardware and software.

  After the initial value random number update process in step S35, the number of times (for example, twice) of reading and checking the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 via the port and the data bus is set (step S36). It is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S37). If the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step S37; N), the process returns to the initial value random number update process (step S35). That is, when no power failure has occurred, the initial value random number update processing and the power failure monitoring signal check (loop processing) are repeated. By permitting an interrupt before the initial value random number update process (step S35) (step S34), if a timer interrupt occurs during the initial value random number update process, the interrupt process is executed preferentially. Can be prevented from being interrupted by waiting for the initial value random number update process.

  The initial value random number update process in step S35 includes a method of performing the initial value random number update process in the timer interrupt process in addition to the main process. In order to avoid execution of the value random number update process, when performing the initial value random number update process in the main process, it is necessary to disable the interrupt and then update to cancel the interrupt. If the initial value random number update process in the timer interrupt process is not performed in the main process and only the main process is performed, there is no problem even if the interrupt is canceled before the initial value random number update process. There is an advantage that it is simplified.

  If the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S37; Y), it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is on for the number of checks set in step S36 (step S38). If the power failure monitoring signal is not on for the number of checks (step S38; N), the process returns to the determination of whether the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S37). Further, when the power failure monitoring signal is kept on for the number of checks (step S38; Y), that is, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred, processing for temporarily prohibiting interruption (step S39), all A process of outputting off data to the output port (step S40) is performed.

  Thereafter, the power failure inspection region check data 1 is saved in the power failure inspection region 1 (step S41), and the power failure inspection region check data 2 is saved in the power failure inspection region 2 (step S42). Further, after performing a checksum calculation process (step S43) for calculating a checksum when the RWM is powered off, and a process for saving the calculated checksum (step S44), a process for prohibiting access to the RWM (step S45). ) And wait for the gaming machine to be turned off. In this way, the check data is saved in the power failure inspection area and the checksum at the time of power shutoff is calculated to determine whether the information stored in the RWM before the power shut down is properly backed up. It can be judged at the time of re-input.

  From the above, the main control means (game control apparatus 100) for overall control of the game, and the slave control means (payout control apparatus 200, effect control apparatus 300, etc.) for performing various controls in accordance with instructions from the main control means. ), The main control means is a standby means (game control apparatus) for setting a predetermined standby time for delaying the start of the main control means and waiting for the start of the slave control device when the power is turned on. 100) and a power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the predetermined waiting time.

The power supply device 400 includes a power supply device 400 that supplies power to various devices. The power supply device 400 is configured to output a power failure monitoring signal when the occurrence of a power failure is detected, and the power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) When a power failure monitoring signal is continuously received over a predetermined period, it is determined that a power failure has occurred.
Further, the main control means (game control device 100) is based on the RAM 111C capable of storing data, the initialization operation unit (initialization switch) capable of being operated from the outside, and the operation of the initialization operation unit. An initialization means (game control device 100) for initializing data stored in the RAM 111C, and the operation state of the initialization means is read before the start of the waiting time.
Further, the main control means (game control apparatus 100) permits access to the RAM 111C after the standby time has elapsed.

[Initial value random number update processing]
FIG. 8 shows the initial value random number update process (step S35) in the main process described above. In this initial value random number update process, first, the big hit symbol initial value random number is updated by +1 (step S61). Then, the winning initial value random number is updated by +1 (step S62), the winning symbol initial value random number is updated by +1 (step S63), and the initial value random number updating process is terminated.
Here, the “big hit symbol initial value random number” is a random number that becomes an initial value of a random number that determines the big hit stop symbol of the special figure variation display game. Also, the “hit initial value random number” is a random number that is the initial value of the random number that determines the hit of the normal variation display game, and the “hit symbol initial value random number” is a random number that determines the hit stop symbol of the normal variation display game It is a random number that becomes the initial value of. In this way, the randomness of the random number can be improved by continuing to increment the initial value random number as long as time permits in the main process.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 9, the timer interrupt process is started when a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator is input to the CPU 111A. When a timer interrupt occurs in the gaming microcomputer 111, the interrupt is automatically disabled and the timer interrupt process of FIG. 9 is started.

When timer interrupt processing is started, first, register bank 1 is designated (step S101). Switching to the register bank 1 is equivalent to performing a register saving process in which a value held in a predetermined register (for example, a register used in the main process) is transferred to the RWM. Next, the upper address of the RAM head address is set in a predetermined register (for example, D register) (step S102). In step S102, the same processing as step S4 in the main processing is performed, but the register bank is different. Next, input processing (step S103) is performed to input from various sensors and switches and to acquire signals, that is, to read the state of each input port. Then, based on the output data set in various processes, an output process (step S104) for performing drive control of an actuator such as a solenoid (large winning opening solenoid 38b, general electric solenoid 37c) or the like is performed.
Note that when a signal for stopping the firing is output in step S5 in the main process, a signal for permitting the firing is output by performing this output process, and the launch permitting signal can be set to the permitted state. This launch permission signal is output to the launch control device via the payout control device. At that time, no signal processing or the like is performed. In addition, the launch permission signal is a first signal indicating a launch permission state viewed from the game control device, and a second signal (launch permission signal) indicating a launch permission state viewed from the payout control device is also a payout control. Generated in the device and output to the launch controller. That is, when two launch permission signals are output to the launch control device and both are permitted to launch, the game ball can be launched.

  Next, a payout command transmission process (step S105), a random number update process 1 (step S106), and a random number update process 2 (step S107) for outputting commands set in the transmission buffer in various processes to the payout control apparatus 200 are performed. Thereafter, it is monitored whether a normal signal is input from the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, the start port 3 switch 97a, the usual gate switch 34a, the winning port switch 35a, and the big winning port switch 38a. Or, a prize opening switch / status monitoring process (step S108) for monitoring errors (whether the front frame or the glass frame is not opened) is performed. Also, a special figure game process (step S109) for performing a process related to the special figure variation display game and a general figure game process (step S110) for performing a process related to the common figure variation display game are performed.

Next, a segment LED editing process (step S111), which is provided in the gaming machine 10 and drives a segment LED that displays special information variation display game and various information related to the game to display desired contents, magnetic sensor 61 Magnet fraud monitoring process (step S112) that performs a process of checking the detection signal from the panel to determine whether there is an abnormality, and a panel radio wave fraud that performs a process of checking the detection signal from the panel radio wave sensor 62 to determine whether there is an abnormality A monitoring process (step S113) is performed. Then, external information editing processing (step S114) for setting signals to be output to various external devices in the output buffer is performed, and the timer interrupt processing is terminated.
Here, in the present embodiment, the process for restoring the interrupt disabled state (that is, the process for allowing the interrupt) and the process for restoring the designation of the register bank (that is, the process for designating the register bank 0) Automatically at the time of the timer interrupt processing. Depending on the CPU used, there is a gaming machine that needs to instruct execution of processing for restoring the interrupt disabled state and processing for restoring the designation of the register bank.

[Payout command transmission processing]
Next, details of the payout command transmission process (step S105) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 10, in the payout command transmission process, first, it is checked whether there is a count in the winning number counter area 2 (step S181).

The winning number counter area is provided in the RAM 111C of the game control device 100, and a winning number counter area 1 and a winning number counter area 2 are provided. The winning number counter area 1 is an area used to transmit a payout command (prize ball command) for instructing the payout control device 200 to pay out a prize ball, and a prize for which a payout command has not yet been transmitted. The winning data corresponding to the ball is stored. That is, the winning number counter area 1 serves as a prize ball command counter capable of storing information relating to the prize ball command.
The winning number counter area 2 is for transmitting a main winning ball signal to be output to an external device every time the number of winning balls (scheduled number of payouts) generated by winning a winning opening reaches a predetermined number (here, 10). The winning data corresponding to the winning ball which is the area to be used and for which the main winning ball signal generation processing is not performed is stored. That is, the winning number counter area 2 serves as a main winning ball signal counter capable of storing information related to the main winning ball signal. In addition to the main prize ball signal, a payout prize ball signal is output to the external device every time the number of prize balls actually paid out from the payout control apparatus 200 reaches a predetermined number (here, 10). By checking these two signals, it is possible to monitor unauthorized payout.

Each of these winning number counter areas has a winning number counter area for each number of winning balls set for each winning opening (in this embodiment, three winning balls, ten winning balls, and 14 winning balls). Is provided, and the count number in the corresponding winning number counter area is incremented by 1 based on winning in the winning opening. That is, information on the winning can be stored in units of one winning in the winning area. Note that a larger area than the winning number counter area 2 is assigned to the winning number counter area 1 so that more winning data can be stored. This is because the main award ball signal can be transmitted regardless of the state of the transmission destination, whereas the payout command may be suspended depending on the state of the payout control device 200 that is the transmission destination. This is because data may be accumulated.
Specifically, in the case of the present embodiment, up to 65535 winnings can be stored in the 3 prize ball counter area, 10 prize ball counter area, and 14 prize ball counter area of the winning number counter area 1, respectively. The 3 prize ball counter area, the 10 prize ball counter area, and the 14 prize ball counter area of the winning number counter area 2 are configured to be able to store up to 255 prizes respectively.

  In the process of checking whether there is a count in the winning number counter area 2 (step S181), among the plurality of winning number counter areas provided for each number of winning balls, “0” is displayed in the winning number counter area to be checked. Judge whether there is any count number. If there is no count number (step S181; N), the address of the winning number counter area 2 to be checked is updated (step S182), and it is checked whether the counting numbers of all the winning number counter areas have been checked. Determination is made (step S183). If it is determined that all checks have been completed (step S183; Y), the process proceeds to step S192. On the other hand, if it is determined that all checks have not been completed (step S183; N), the process returns to step S181 and the above processing is repeated. In the case of the present embodiment, the address of the winning number counter area 2 to be checked is updated in the order of 3 prize ball counter areas → 10 prize ball counter areas → 14 prize ball counter areas.

  If it is determined in step S181 that there is a count number (step S181; Y), the count number in the target winning number counter area is updated by -1 (step S184), and the target winning number counter area 2 is updated. The number of payouts corresponding to the address is acquired (step S185). Then, the value of the winning ball remaining area and the acquired payout number are added (step S186), and the addition result is saved in the winning ball remaining area (step S187). As the value of the remaining prize ball area before this processing, a fraction that does not satisfy a predetermined number that is a reference for output of the main prize ball signal is stored.

Thereafter, 10 is subtracted from the addition result (step S188), and it is determined whether or not the subtraction result is 0 or more (step S189). If it is 0 or more (step S189; Y), the value of the main prize ball signal output frequency area is updated by +1 (step S190). That is, every time the remaining number of prize balls reaches 10, the number of outputs of the main prize ball signal is updated by +1.
Then, the subtraction result is saved in the award ball remaining number area (step S191), and the process returns to step S188. As a result, the main winning ball signal is output to an external device such as a hall computer. That is, the game control device 100 serves as an external information output means for outputting a main prize ball signal including information on the number of prize balls determined to be paid out as a result of winning a game ball to a predetermined prize area to the outside of the gaming machine. . In addition, by outputting the main prize ball signal, when game balls are paid out during a big hit, the output of the prize ball signal is delayed with the payout of game balls. It is possible to prevent a problem that the number of prize balls cannot be counted.
Here, the process of steps S181 to S191 is a process of updating (increasing) the number of outputs of the main prize ball signal, and the process of steps S192 to S201 is a process of transmitting a payout command.

In step S192, if the payout command transmission timer is not "0", -1 is updated (step S192), and it is determined whether the payout command transmission timer has become "0" (step S193). If the payout command transmission timer is not “0” (step S193; N), the payout command transmission process is terminated. If the payout command transmission timer is “0” (step S193; Y), the payout busy signal flag is checked to determine whether the payout busy signal is busy (step S194).
The payout busy signal is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can immediately start payout control. If the payout control cannot be started immediately, the payout busy signal is turned on (busy state). Is done. That is, the payout busy signal can be said to be a signal indicating whether or not a payout command (prize ball command) can be received. That is, the payout busy signal is a status signal indicating whether or not the payout control means (payout control device 200) can start payout control.

If the payout busy signal is busy (step S194; Y), the payout command transmission process is terminated. That is, in this embodiment, instead of transmitting a payout command for each timer interruption, a predetermined time has elapsed (the value of the payout command transmission timer becomes 0), and the payout control device 200 side can pay out a prize ball. In the state, the payout command is transmitted. In this way, when the payout control device 200 cannot immediately start payout control and does not transmit a payout command, it is possible to perform useless processing by not performing subsequent processing relating to the transmission of the payout command. To prevent and reduce the burden of control.
Conditions for the payout busy signal to be in the on state (busy state) include, for example, during a payout operation, a ball lending operation, a shot ball outage error, an overflow error, a frame radio fraud occurrence, a payout ball detection switch (paid out The number of award balls to be paid out in the memory of the payout control device 200 during an abnormal state of a switch for monitoring a ball, an underpayment error, an excessive payout error, or the number of unpaid award balls = the number of game balls remaining ), Etc. (when not = 0).

  If the payout busy signal is not busy (step S194; N), it is checked whether there is a count in the winning number counter area 1 (step S195). In the process of checking whether there is a count in the winning number counter area 1 (step S195), among the plurality of winning number counter areas provided for each number of winning balls, “0” is displayed in the winning number counter area to be checked. Judge whether there is any count number.

  If there is no count number (step S195; N), the address of the winning number counter area 1 to be checked is updated (step S196), and it is checked whether the counting numbers of all the winning number counter areas have been checked. Determination is made (step S197). If it is determined that all checks have been completed (step S197; Y), the payout command transmission process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that all checks have not been completed (step S197; N), the process returns to step S195 and the above process is repeated. In the case of this embodiment, the address of the winning number counter area 1 to be checked is updated in the order of 3 prize ball counter areas → 10 prize ball counter areas → 14 prize ball counter areas.

  If it is determined in step S195 that there is a count number (step S195; Y), the count number in the target winning number counter area is updated by -1 (step S198), and the target winning number counter area 1 is updated. The payout number command corresponding to the address is acquired (step S199). Then, the acquired payout number command is written in the payout serial transmission buffer (step S200), the initial value is saved in the payout command transmission timer area (step S201), and the payout command transmission process is terminated. The payout command transmission timer is for managing the transmission interval, and for example, 200 msec is set as an initial value.

As a result, a payout command (prize ball command) in units of one win in the winning area is generated and transmitted to the payout control device 200. The payout control device 200 performs control for paying out a predetermined number of prize balls based on the payout command. That is, the game control device 100 indicates that the state signal indicating whether or not the payout control means output from the payout control means (payout control device 200) can start payout control can start payout control. A prize ball command transmitting means for transmitting a prize ball command to the payout control means.
As described above, the game control device 100 performs control to transmit the award ball command based on the state signal output from the payout control device 200, so that the award is given only when the payout control device 200 can immediately execute payout control. A ball command will be sent. As a result, data corresponding to a winning that has not yet been paid out is held on the game control device 100 side, so that it is backed up by the game control device 100 when a power failure occurs, and is backed up to the payout control device 200. Even if it does not have the function to do, accurate payout control can be realized.

In a conventional gaming machine (for example, a gaming machine disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2000-312759), when a power-off state occurs for some reason, the payout control device 200 backs up data in its storage means and immediately before power-off. The payout control state based on the data is maintained. However, the conventional gaming machine requires a function for backing up, resulting in a problem of increasing costs. According to the present invention, accurate payout control can be realized without providing the payout control apparatus 200 with a function for backing up.
Also, since the main prize ball signal transmitted to the external device is output regardless of the state of the payout busy signal, the main prize ball signal can be output without delay. The time can be accurately grasped, for example, the base value can be grasped accurately. Also, since the prize ball command counter capable of storing information relating to the prize ball command and the main prize ball signal counter capable of storing information relating to the main prize ball signal are separately provided, the prize ball command and the main prize ball having different transmission timings are provided. Signal information can be managed separately, and information can be managed reliably.

  From the above, the game control is performed in an integrated manner, and the winning areas provided in the gaming area 32 (the first starting winning port 36, the second starting winning port 97, the normal variable winning device 37, the general winning port 35, the special winning port 35, Game control means (game control apparatus 100) for transmitting a prize ball command based on winning of a game ball to the variable prize winning device 38), and game ball payout control based on the prize ball command transmitted from the game control means A payout control means (payout control apparatus 200) for performing the game, and the game control means outputs a status signal (busy signal) indicating whether or not the payout control means output from the payout control means can start payout control. The payout control means transmits a prize ball command to the payout control means, and when a power failure occurs and the power supply recovers from the power failure, the payout control means outputs a status signal indicating that the payout control can be started. Toshi However, the award ball command is not immediately transmitted to the payout control means, and the award ball corresponding to the fact that the state signal indicating that the payout control can be started from the payout control means is continuously output for a predetermined period. The command is transmitted to the payout control means.

  In addition, a plurality of winning areas (first start winning opening 36, second starting winning opening 97, ordinary variable winning apparatus 37, general winning opening 35, special variable winning apparatus 38) having a different number of winning balls are provided in the game area 32. The control means (game control device 100) includes a prize ball command counter (game control device 100) capable of specifying whether or not a prize ball command for instructing game ball payout control is not transmitted for each prize ball number. When the signal indicates that the payout control can be started and there is an unsent prize ball command in each prize ball command counter, the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control means (payout control device 200). The status signal specifies whether or not the payout control means can start payout control before specifying whether or not there is an unsent prize ball command in each prize ball command counter. Will be.

  In addition to performing overall game control, a game to a predetermined winning area (first start winning port 36, second starting winning port 97, ordinary variable winning device 37, general winning port 35, special variable winning device 38). Game control means (game control device 100) for transmitting a prize ball command based on winning a ball, and payout control means (payout control) for paying out a game ball based on a prize ball command transmitted from the game control means Device 200), and the game control means indicates that the payout control means outputted from the payout control means can start the payout control. A prize ball command transmission means (game control device 100) for sending a prize ball command to the payout control means when there is a game, and information on the number of prize balls determined to be paid out when a game ball is won in a predetermined prize area Prize ball signal An external information output means (game control device 100) for outputting the game signal to the outside of the gaming machine, and the external information output means outputs a status signal output from the payout control means, and the payout control means pays out. The prize ball signal is output regardless of whether the control can be started or not.

  In addition, the prize ball command transmission means (game control device 100) immediately receives a prize ball command even when a power failure occurs and the status signal indicates that the payout control can be started when the power failure is restored. Is not transmitted to the payout control means (payout control device 200), and a prize ball command is issued in response to a state in which the state signal indicates that the payout control can be started for a predetermined period of time. This means that it is transmitted to the payout control means.

  Further, the game control means (game control device 100) has a prize ball command counter (game control device 100) capable of storing information relating to a prize ball command and a prize capable of storing information relating to a prize ball signal (main prize ball signal). A ball signal counter (game control device 100), and a prize ball command transmission means (game control device 100) is a predetermined winning area (first start winning port 36, second start winning port 97, normal variation winning device). 37, a single winning ball command is generated in units of a single winning to the general winning opening 35, the special variable winning device 38), and the status signal indicates that the payout control can be started. Is sent to the payout control means (payout control device 200), and the winning ball command counter (game control device 100) can store information on the winning in units of one winning in a predetermined winning area. Yes, given The game ball is updated at the time of winning a game ball in the prize area, and the update is performed in response to the transmission of the prize ball command to the payout control means, so that the number of prize ball commands not transmitted can be stored. The information output means accumulates the number of winning balls determined to be paid out in accordance with the winning of game balls to a predetermined winning area, and outputs a winning ball signal to the outside of the gaming machine every time the accumulated value reaches a predetermined number. The winning ball signal counter is capable of storing information on the winning in units of one winning in a predetermined winning area, and is updated when a game ball is won in the predetermined winning area, and external information By updating in accordance with the accumulation process of the number of prize balls by the output means, the number of prize balls that have not yet been accumulated can be stored.

[Prize mouth switch / status monitoring process]
FIG. 11 shows a winning mouth switch / status monitoring process (step S108) in the timer interrupt process. In this winning a prize opening switch / status monitoring process, first, a winning prize monitoring table 1 corresponding to one of the big winning prize opening switches 38a in the special winning prize opening (special variable prize winning device 38) is prepared (step S301), and the big winning prize opening is obtained. In spite of not being opened, an illegal & winning monitoring process (step S302) for monitoring whether or not there is an illegal winning in the big winning opening and detecting a normal winning is executed.
Thereafter, a winning opening monitoring table 2 corresponding to the other large winning opening switch 38a in the large winning opening (special variable winning apparatus 38) is prepared (step S303), and it is monitored whether there is an illegal winning and a normal winning is made. The detected fraud & prize winning monitoring process (step S304) is executed.

  In the winning opening monitoring table, the monitoring switch bit indicating the position of data for determining whether or not there is an input to the target switch, the lower address of fraud monitoring information, the lower address of the illegal winning number area, the illegal winning error notification command, the illegal winning prize Number upper limit value (number of fraud occurrence determination), address of winning prize switch table, information of notification timer update information (permit / update) are defined. The winning table of the winning mouth monitoring table includes a monitoring switch bit, a lower address of the winning number counter area 1, a winning number counter area 2 for each switch, in addition to the number of monitoring repetitions (the number of switches). The lower address information is defined. The winning opening monitoring table is prepared according to each switch to be monitored.

  Next, a winning opening monitoring table for the winning opening switch (starting opening 2 switch 37a) in the ordinary electric power system is prepared (step S305), and an illegal & winning monitoring process for monitoring whether there is an illegal winning and detecting a normal winning. (Step S306) is executed. And a winning opening switch (for example, a starting opening 1 switch 36a, a starting opening 3 switch 97a, a winning opening switch 35a of a general winning opening 35, a left winning opening switch, a right winning opening switch, which can always win a prize (no fraud monitoring process is required). )) Is prepared (step S307), a winning number counter updating process (step S308) for updating the winning number is performed, and a start port error monitoring process (step S309) is performed.

Next, a state scan counter for sequentially specifying which switch or signal among the plurality of switches and signals to be monitored is to be monitored this time is updated (step S310). In the present embodiment, the state scan counter is updated in the range of 0 to 3. Thereafter, the gaming machine state monitoring table 1 for setting the state to be monitored is prepared according to the value of the state scan counter (step S311). Then, a gaming machine state check process (step S312) for determining a state such as whether an error has occurred is performed.
In the case of this embodiment, referring to the value of the state scan counter in the gaming machine state monitoring table 1, when the value of the state scan counter is “0”, the switch abnormality output due to the occurrence of disconnection of the switch connector or the like The state monitoring based on the 1 signal is set, and when the value of the state scan counter is “1”, the state monitoring based on the shot ball break switch signal from the payout control device 200 is set. When the value of the state scan counter is “2”, state monitoring based on the overflow switch signal is set, and when the value of the state scan counter is “3”, state monitoring based on the payout abnormality status signal is set. The

Next, the gaming machine state monitoring table 2 for setting the state to be monitored is prepared according to the value of the state scan counter (step S313). Then, a gaming machine state check process (step S314) for determining a state such as whether an error has occurred is performed.
In the case of the present embodiment, the value of the state scan counter is referred to the gaming machine state monitoring table 2, and when the value of the state scan counter is “0”, it is based on the signal output from the glass frame open detection switch 63. The state monitoring is set, and when the value of the state scan counter is “1”, the state monitoring based on the signal output from the main body frame open detection switch 64 is set. When the value of the state scan counter is “2”, state monitoring based on the fraud signal is set, and when the value of the state scan counter is “3”, state monitoring based on the touch switch signal is set. Is set.

Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the state scan counter is “0” (step S315). If the value of the error scan counter is not “0” (step S315; N), the winning prize switch / state monitoring process is performed. finish. In this case, there is no state monitoring target in the gaming machine state monitoring table 3 referred to next. When the value of the error scan counter is “0” (step S315; Y), the gaming machine state monitoring table 3 is prepared (step S316), and a gaming machine for judging a state such as whether an error has occurred or not. A state check process (step S317) is performed.
In the case of this embodiment, referring to the value of the state scan counter in the gaming machine state monitoring table 3, when the value of the state scan counter is “0”, the switch abnormality output due to the occurrence of disconnection of the switch connector or the like A state monitoring based on two signals is set. The gaming machine state monitoring table 3 is not defined when the state scan counter is “1” to “3”.

  Thereafter, a payout busy signal check process (step S318) for checking a payout busy signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can start payout control is performed, and the winning opening switch / state monitoring process is ended. Note that the processing of steps S316 to S318 is executed only when the value of the state scan counter updated for each timer interrupt is “0”, so that it is executed at a rate of once every four timer interrupts. Become. That is, when the timer interrupt is performed every 4 milliseconds, the processing from step S316 to S318 is performed every 16 milliseconds.

[Special Figure Game Processing]
Next, the details of the special game process (step S109) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. In the special figure game process, the input of the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, and the start port 3 switch 97a are monitored, the entire process related to the special figure variation display game is controlled, and the special figure display is set.

As shown in FIG. 12, in the special game process, first, a start port switch monitoring process (step A1) for monitoring a winning of the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, and the start port 3 switch 97a is performed. In the start port switch monitoring process, when a game ball wins in the first start winning port 36, the second start winning port 97, and the normal variation winning device 37, various random numbers (such as a big hit random number) are extracted, A game result preliminary determination is performed in advance to determine a game result based on a prize in a stage before the start of the special figure variation display game based on the game.
Next, a special winning opening switch monitoring process (step A2) is performed. In the special winning prize switch monitoring process, a process for monitoring the detection of a game ball at the special winning prize switch 38a provided in the special variable winning device 38 is performed.

  Next, if the special figure game processing timer is not "0", -1 is updated (step A3). The minimum value of the special figure game processing timer is set to “0”. Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure game process timer is “0” (step A4). When the value of the special figure game process timer is “0” (step A4; Y), that is, when the time has expired or has already expired, reference is made to branch to the process corresponding to the special figure game process number. The special figure game sequence branch table to be set is set in the register (step A5), and the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure game process number is acquired using the table (step A6). Then, a subroutine call is made according to the special figure game process number (step A7).

In step A7, when the special figure game process number is “0”, the fluctuation start of the special figure fluctuation display game is monitored, the fluctuation start setting of the special figure fluctuation display game, the setting of the production, A special figure routine process (step A8) for setting information necessary for the process is performed.
In step A7, when the special figure game process number is “1”, special figure changing process for setting a special figure stop display time, setting information necessary for performing the special figure display process, etc. (Step A9) is performed.

In step A7, if the special figure game process number is “2”, if the game result of the special figure fluctuation display game is a big hit, the fanfare command is set according to the type of the big hit, and the big winning opening for each big hit A special chart display process (step A10) is performed for setting the fanfare time according to the release pattern and setting information necessary for performing the fanfare / interval process.
In step A7, when the special figure game process number is “3”, setting of the opening time of the big prize opening, updating of the number of times of opening, setting of information necessary for performing the process during opening of the big prize opening, etc. are performed. Processing during fanfare / interval (step A11) is performed.

In step A7, when the special figure game process number is “4”, if the big hit round is not the final round, the interval command is set, while if it is the final round, the ending command is set, A special winning opening opening process (step A12) for setting information necessary for performing the ball process is performed.
In step A7, when the special figure game process number is “5”, if the big hit round is the final round, a process for setting a time for discharging the remaining balls in the big winning opening and a big hit end process are performed. A big winning opening remaining ball process (step A13) for setting information necessary for the execution is performed.
In step A7, when the special figure game process number is “6”, a big hit end process (step A14) for setting information necessary for performing the special figure ordinary process is performed.

  Then, after preparing the table for controlling the fluctuation | variation of the special figure 1 indicator 51a (step A15), the symbol fluctuation | variation control process (step A16) which concerns on the special figure 1 indicator 51a is performed. And after preparing the table for controlling the fluctuation | variation of the special figure 2 indicator 51b (step A17), the symbol fluctuation control process (step A18) which concerns on the special figure 2 indicator 51b is performed, and a special figure game process is complete | finished. To do. On the other hand, if the value of the special figure game process timer is not “0” in step A4 (step A4; N), that is, if the time has not expired, the process proceeds to step A15 and the subsequent processes are performed. Do.

  The jackpot is a special result that accompanies the operation of the condition device. The condition device is activated when a big hit occurs in the special figure fluctuation display game (stop display of the big hit symbol). When the conditional device is activated, for example, a big hit state occurs and a special electric accessory It means that a specific flag for continuously operating the variable winning device 38 is set (actual accessory continuous operation device is operated). The “condition device” may be software means such as a flag that is turned on / off in software as described above, or may be hardware means such as a switch that is electrically turned on / off. In addition, the “condition device” is a term generally used in the field of pachinko gaming machines as a device whose operation is a necessary condition for continuous operation of the electric accessory, and the same applies to this specification. It is used as a term having a meaning.

[Starter switch monitoring process]
Next, details of the start port switch monitoring process (step A1) in the above-described special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 13, in the start port switch monitoring process, first, a first start port (first start winning port 36) winning monitoring table is prepared (step A101), and a hard random number acquisition process (step A102) is performed. In this hard random number acquisition process, when there is an input to the target start port switch (start port 1 switch 36a in this case), the big hit random number extracted to the latch register is loaded and prepared, and the target start port is sent. The information indicating that there has been a winning is set. Thereafter, it is determined whether or not there is a prize at the first start port which is the start port of FIG. 1 (step A103).
If it is determined in step A103 that there is no winning at the first start opening (step A103; N), the process proceeds to step A109 and the subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A103 that there is a winning at the first start opening (step A103; Y), it is determined whether or not the special figure is running shortly (under normal power support) (step A104). ).

If it is determined in step A104 that the special drawing time is not short (step A104; N), the process proceeds to step A107, and the subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A104 that the special drawing time is short (step A104; Y), a right-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step A105), and an effect command setting process (step A106) is performed. . That is, if the time is short, the right-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step A105) and the effect command setting process (step A106) is performed regardless of the probability state of the special figure variation display game. In the case of the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the first starting port (first starting winning port 36) is not left unless it is left-handed, and the normal variation winning device 37 is not winning unless it is right-handed. Therefore, in the short-time state, a right-handed game is more advantageous than left-handed, but when there is a winning at the first starting port during the short-time state (that is, when left-handed during the short-time state). Is configured such that a right-handed instruction notification command is transmitted to the effect control device 300, and a notification (warning) for instructing to right-hand is performed by the effect control device 300.
Next, after preparing a table for setting information on hold by the first start opening (first start winning opening 36) (step A107), special figure start opening switch common processing (step A108) is performed.

Next, a second start opening (ordinary variable winning device 37) winning monitoring table is prepared (step A109), and a hard random number acquisition process (step A110) is performed. In this hard random number acquisition process, when there is an input to the target start port switch (here, the start port 2 switch 37a), the jackpot random number extracted to the latch register is loaded and prepared, and the target start port is sent. The information indicating that there has been a winning is set. Thereafter, it is determined whether or not there is a prize at the second start port, which is the start port of FIG. 2 (step A111).
If it is determined in step A111 that there is no winning at the second start opening (step A111; N), the process proceeds to step A116 and the subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A111 that there is a winning at the second starting port (step A111; Y), the ordinary electric accessory (ordinary variable winning device 37) is operating, that is, normal variation. If the winning device 37 is activated to determine whether or not the game ball is open (step A112), and if it is determined that the ordinary electric accessory is operating (step A112; Y), the step The process proceeds to A114, and the subsequent processes are performed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step A112 that the ordinary electric accessory is not in operation (step A112; N), it is determined whether or not a normal electric power fraud has occurred (step A113).

  In step A113, it is determined that fraud is occurring when the number of fraudulent winnings to the normal variation winning device 37 is equal to or greater than the fraud determination number (for example, 5). The normal variation winning device 37 cannot win a game ball in the closed state, and can win a game ball only in the open state. Therefore, when the game ball wins in the closed state, it is a case where some abnormality or fraud has occurred. When there is a game ball won in such a closed state, the number is counted as the number of illegal wins. Then, when the number of illegal winnings counted in this way is equal to or larger than a predetermined fraud occurrence determination number (upper limit value), it is determined that fraud has occurred.

  If it is determined in step A113 that the power transmission fraud has not occurred (step A113; N), a table for setting information on hold by the second start opening (ordinary variable winning device 37) is prepared (step A114). After performing the special figure starting port switch common process (step A115), the process proceeds to the process of step A116, and the subsequent processes are performed. Further, when it is determined in step A113 that the power transmission fraud is occurring (step A113; Y), the process proceeds to step A116 and the subsequent processes are performed.

Next, a winning start monitoring table for the third starting opening (second starting winning opening 97) is prepared (step A116), and a hard random number acquisition process (step A117) is performed. In this hard random number acquisition processing, when there is an input to the target start port switch (start port 3 switch 97a in this case), the big hit random number extracted to the latch register is loaded and prepared, and the target start port is sent. The information indicating that there has been a winning is set. Thereafter, it is determined whether or not there is a winning at the third starting port which is the starting port of FIG. 2 (step A118).
If it is determined in step A118 that there is no winning at the third starting port (step A118; N), the starting port switch monitoring process is terminated.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step A118 that there is a winning at the third starting port (step A118; Y), it is determined whether or not the special drawing is being shortened (medium power support is in progress) (step A119). ).

If it is determined in step A119 that the special drawing time is not short (step A119; N), the process proceeds to step A122 and the subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step A119 that the special drawing time is short (step A119; Y), a right-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step A120), and an effect command setting process (step A121) is performed. . That is, if the time is short, regardless of the probability state of the special figure variation display game, a right-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step A120), and an effect command setting process (step A121) is performed. In the case of the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the third starting port (second starting winning port 97) will not win unless it is left-handed, and the normal variable winning device 37 will not win if it is not right-handed. Therefore, in the short-time state, a right-handed game is more advantageous than the left-handed state, but when the third starting port is won during the short-time state (that is, when left-handed during the short-time state). Is configured such that a right-handed instruction notification command is transmitted to the effect control device 300, and a notification (warning) for instructing to right-hand is performed by the effect control device 300.
Next, after preparing a table for setting information on hold by the third start port (second start winning port 97) (step A122), the special start port switch common processing (step A123) is performed to monitor the start port switch. The process ends.

[Hard random number acquisition processing]
Next, the details of the hard random number acquisition process (steps A102, A110, A117) in the above-described start port switch monitoring process will be described. As shown in FIG. 14, in the hard random number acquisition process, first, the first starting port (first starting winning port 36), the second starting port (ordinary variable winning device 37), and the third starting port (second starting winning port). No winning information of the monitoring target starting port is set (step A131), and the monitoring target starting port among the starting port 1 switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a, and the starting port 3 switch 97a is set. It is determined whether or not there is an input to the switch (step A132).
Then, when there is no input to the monitored start port switch (step A132; N), the hard random number acquisition process is terminated.
On the other hand, if there is an input to the monitoring target start switch (step A132; Y), the random number latch register status is read (step A133), and it is determined whether there is latch data in the target random number latch register (step A134). .

If there is no latch data in the target random number latch register (step A134; N), that is, if no random number has been extracted, the hard random number acquisition process is terminated.
When there is latch data in the target random number latch register (step A134; Y), the big hit random number extracted in the monitored hard random number latch register is loaded and prepared (step A135). Of the first starting port (first starting winning port 36), the second starting port (ordinary variable winning device 37), and the third starting port (second starting winning port 97), the monitoring target starting port is selected. Existence information is set (step A136), and the hard random number acquisition process is terminated.

[Special figure start port switch common processing]
Next, details of the special start port switch common process (steps A108, A115, A123) in the above-described start port switch monitoring process will be described. The special figure start port switch common process is a process performed in common for each input when there is an input from the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, or the start port 3 switch 97a.

As shown in FIG. 15, in the special figure start port switch common process, first, among the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, and the start port 3 switch 97a, the number of winnings to the monitored start port switch The start port signal output count, which is the number of times information related to the management device external to the gaming machine 10, is output (step A141), the loaded value is updated by 1 (step A142), and the output count overflows. Is determined (step A143).
If the number of outputs does not overflow (step A143; N), the updated value is saved in the starter signal output number area of the RWM (step A144), and the process proceeds to step A145.
On the other hand, if the number of outputs overflows (step A143; Y), the process proceeds to step A145. In the present embodiment, values from “0” to “255” can be stored in the start port signal output frequency area. When the loaded value is “255”, the updated value becomes “0” by +1 update, and it is determined that the output count overflows, so that it is not saved.

Next, of the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, and the start port 3 switch 97a, it is determined whether the number of special figure reservations (starting memory) to be updated corresponding to the monitored start port switch is less than the upper limit value. Determine (step A145).
When the number of special figure hold to be updated is not less than the upper limit value (step A145; N), the special figure start port switch common process is terminated.
If the number of special figure reservations to be updated is less than the upper limit (step A145; Y), update the number of special figure reservations to be updated (number of special figure 1 or number 2) (+1) ( Step A146), a decoration special figure hold number command corresponding to the monitoring target start opening switch and the special figure hold number is prepared (step A147), and a production command setting process (step A148) is performed, and the target start opening winning flag is set. Is saved (step A149). Subsequently, the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the start port switch to be monitored and the number of reserved special figures is calculated (step A150), and the big hit random number prepared in the hard random number acquisition process of steps A102, A110, A117 is calculated as RWM. Is saved in the big hit random number storage area (step A151). Next, the jackpot symbol random number of the starter switch to be monitored is extracted, prepared (step A152), and saved in the jackpot symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step A153). This jackpot symbol random number is used in the special figure hold information determination process (step A157).

Next, the fluctuation pattern random numbers (in the present embodiment, fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 2) are saved in the fluctuation pattern random number storage area of the corresponding RWM (step A154).
Next, the address of the change order flag storage area corresponding to the total number of the special figure 1 hold and the special figure 2 hold (any place from the hold 1 to 8) is calculated (step A155), and the calculated area is the target. The change order flag (see Fig. 1 or Fig. 2) is saved (step A156), the special figure hold information determination process (step A157) is performed, and the special figure start port switch common process is terminated.

  Here, the game control device 100 (RAM 111C) extracts a predetermined random number based on the inflow of game balls into the start winning area of the first start winning port 36, the second start winning port 97, and the normal variable winning device 37. A start storage means for storing a predetermined number as an upper limit as start storage that is the right to execute the variable display game is provided. In addition, the start storage means (game control device 100) is a first random number value extracted based on the winning of a game ball to the first start winning opening 36 which is the starting opening of FIG. 2nd start with a predetermined number as the upper limit of various random numbers extracted based on the winning of game balls to the second start winning opening 97 which is the starting opening of FIG. Memorize as memory.

[Special figure hold information judgment processing]
Next, the details of the special figure hold information determination process (step A157) in the above special figure start port switch common process will be described. The special figure hold information determination process is a prefetching process for determining the result related information corresponding to the start memory before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding start memory.

As shown in FIG. 16, first, a low-probability determination flag is prepared (step A161), and pre-reading for determining whether or not the jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value (big hit low-probability determination value). A jackpot determination process (step A162) is performed, and it is determined whether a jackpot is set as a determination result (step A163).
If it is determined in step A163 that the jackpot is set as the determination result (step A163; Y), a jackpot symbol random number check table corresponding to the target start-up switch is set (step A164), and prepared in step A152. Stop symbol information corresponding to the jackpot symbol random number is acquired (step A165), and the process proceeds to step A167.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A163 that the big hit is not set as the determination result (step A163; N), that is, when the deviation is set as the determination result, the stop symbol information of the deviation is set (step A166). ), The process proceeds to step A167.

In step A167, the stop symbol information acquired in step A165 or the stop symbol information set in step A166 is saved in the symbol information area (step A167).
Next, a look-ahead stop symbol command (low probability) corresponding to the target start port switch and stop symbol information is prepared (step A168), and an effect command setting process (step A169) is performed.
Next, a high-probability determination flag is prepared (step A170), and a look-ahead jackpot determination process for determining whether or not the jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value (big hit high probability determination value) or not (step A171). And determine whether or not the big hit is set as the determination result (step A172).
If it is determined in step A172 that the jackpot is set as the determination result (step A172; Y), the jackpot symbol random number check table corresponding to the target starter switch is set (step A173), and preparation is performed in step A152. The stop symbol information corresponding to the jackpot symbol random number obtained is acquired (step A174), and the process proceeds to step A176.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A172 that the big hit is not set as the determination result (step A172; N), that is, when the deviation is set as the determination result, the stop symbol information of the deviation is set (step A175), the process proceeds to step A176.

In step A176, it is determined whether or not the special figure has a high probability (step A176).
If it is determined in step A176 that the special figure is not in high probability (step A176; N), the process proceeds to step A178.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step A176 that the special symbol has a high probability (step A176; Y), the stop symbol acquired in step A174 is stored in the symbol information area where the stop symbol information is saved in step A167. The information or the stopped symbol information set in step A175 is overwritten and saved (step A177), and the process proceeds to step A178. The stop symbol information saved in the symbol information area is used for prefetching the variation pattern.

In step A178, a pre-read stop symbol command (high probability) corresponding to the target start opening switch and stop symbol information is prepared (step A178), and an effect command setting process (step A179) is performed. Thus, in this embodiment, every time the special figure hold information determination process is executed, the effect control device 300 transmits the result determined with the jackpot low probability determination value and the result determined with the jackpot high probability determination value. Is done.
Next, special figure information setting processing (step A180) for setting special figure information, which is a parameter for setting a fluctuation pattern, is performed, and fluctuation pattern setting processing for setting the fluctuation mode of the special figure fluctuation display game is performed (step S180). A181).

  Thereafter, a pre-reading variation pattern command corresponding to the variation pattern number indicating the variation pattern in the variation mode of the special figure variation display game is prepared (step A182), an effect command setting process is performed (step A183), and the special figure hold information determination is performed. The process ends. The special figure information setting process in step A180 and the variation pattern setting process in step A181 are the same as the processes executed at the start of the special figure fluctuation display game in the special figure ordinary process.

With the above processing, the prefetch stop symbol command including the result of the special figure variation display game based on the start memory to be prefetched and the prefetch variation pattern command including the information of the variation pattern in the special figure variation display game based on the start memory are obtained. It is prepared and transmitted to the production control device 300. As a result, the determination result (prefetch result) of the result related information corresponding to the start memory (whether it is a big hit or the type of the fluctuation pattern) is controlled before the start timing of the special figure change display game based on the corresponding start memory. The device 300 can be notified, and in particular, by changing the decoration special figure start memory display displayed on the display device 41, the result related information is given to the player before the start timing of the special figure variable display game. It is possible to notify.
That is, the game control device 100 determines a random number stored as start memory in the start memory means (game control device 100) before the execution of the variable display game based on the start memory (for example, whether or not a special result is obtained). It is a pre-determination means. Note that the time when the random number value stored in correspondence with the start memory is determined in advance is not only at the start winning time when the start memory is generated, but any time before the variable display game based on the start memory is performed. Good.

[Special figure routine processing]
Next, the details of the special figure routine process (step A8) in the special figure game process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 17, in the special figure normal processing, first, it is determined whether both the special figure 1 hold number and the special figure 2 hold number are "0" (step A301).
In step A301, if it is determined that both the special figure 1 hold number and the special figure 2 hold number are not "0" (step A301; N), the flag is loaded from the variable order flag storage area (for the hold number total 1). Then (step A302), it is determined whether or not the current variation is that of FIG. 1 (step A303).
When it is determined in step A303 that the current variation is the variation of the special figure 1 (step A303; Y), a decorative special figure hold number command corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number is prepared (step A304). An effect command setting process (step A305) is performed, a special figure 1 fluctuation start process (step A306) is performed, and the special figure normal process is terminated. At this time, the special figure 1 hold number is not updated by -1, but in step A304, a command (decoration special figure hold number command) corresponding to the updated value of -1 is prepared.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step A303 that the current fluctuation is not the fluctuation of special figure 1 (step A303; N), that is, if the current fluctuation is a fluctuation of special figure 2, it corresponds to the special figure 2 holding number. A decoration special figure hold number command to be prepared is prepared (step A307), an effect command setting process (step A308) is performed, a special figure 2 variation start process (step A309) is performed, and the special figure ordinary process is terminated. At this time, the special figure 2 hold number is not updated by -1, but in step A307, a command (decoration special figure hold number command) corresponding to the updated value of -1 is prepared.

In step A301, if it is determined that both the special figure 1 hold number and the special figure 2 hold number are “0” (step A301; Y), it is determined whether the customer waiting demonstration has been started ( Step A310) If the customer waiting demo has already started (Step A310; Y), the process proceeds to Step A315.
If the customer waiting demo has not been started (step A310; N), a customer waiting demo flag is set in the customer waiting demo flag area (step A311).
Subsequently, a customer waiting demonstration command is prepared (step A312), and an effect command setting process (step A313) is performed. Thereafter, an initial value (for example, a value corresponding to 5 minutes) is saved in the customer waiting demo progress timer area for monitoring the passage of a certain time from the start of the customer waiting state (step A314), and the process proceeds to step A315.

  If the customer waiting demo elapsed timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step A315), "0" for the special figure normal process is set as the process number (step A316), and the process number is set as the special figure game process number. The area is saved (step A317), and the variable symbol discrimination flag area is cleared (step A318). Then, the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the special prize opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A319), and the special figure routine processing is terminated.

[Special Figure 1 Change Start Processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 variation start process (step A306) in the above-described special figure ordinary process will be described. The special figure 1 fluctuation start process is a process performed at the start of the first special figure fluctuation display game. As shown in FIG. 18A, first, the special figure 1 variation flag indicating the type of special figure variation display game to be executed (here, special figure 1) is saved in the variation symbol discrimination flag area (step A321). A jackpot flag 1 setting process (step A322) is performed for setting the shift information and jackpot information to the jackpot flag 1 for determining whether or not the special figure variation display game is a jackpot.

Next, after performing the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step A323) relating to the setting of the special figure 1 stop symbol (symbol information), the special figure which sets the special symbol information which is a parameter for setting the variation pattern An information setting process (step A324) is performed to prepare a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting information table which is a table in which information for referring to various information related to the setting of the fluctuation pattern of the first special figure fluctuation display game is set. (Step A325). Thereafter, a variation pattern setting process (step A326) for setting a variation pattern which is a variation mode in the first special figure variation display game is performed, and a variation start information setting process for setting information of variation start of the first special figure variation display game. (Step A327) is performed.
Next, “1” relating to the special figure changing process is set as the process number (step A328), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A329).

  Next, the customer waiting demo flag area is cleared (step A330), and a signal related to the start of fluctuation in FIG. Thereafter, the changing flag is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step A332), and the initial value of the blinking control timer (timer of the blinking period of the special figure 1 display 51a) is saved in the special figure 1 blink control timer area. For example, 100 ms) is saved (step A333), an initial value (for example, 0) is saved in the special figure 1 variation symbol number area (step A334), and the special figure 1 fluctuation start process is terminated.

[Special Figure 2 Variation Start Processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (step A309) in the above-described special figure ordinary process will be described. The special figure 2 fluctuation start process is a process performed at the start of the second special figure fluctuation display game, and the same process as the special figure 1 fluctuation start process shown in FIG. This is for memory.

  As shown in FIG. 18 (b), first, the special figure 2 variation flag indicating the type of the special figure variation display game to be executed (here, special figure 2) is saved in the variation symbol discrimination flag area (step A341). 2. A big hit flag 2 setting process (step A342) for setting shift information and big hit information to the big hit flag 2 for determining whether or not the special figure variation display game is a big hit.

Next, after performing the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step A343) relating to the setting of the special figure 2 stop symbol (symbol information), the special symbol for setting the special symbol information which is a parameter for setting the variation pattern An information setting process (step A344) is performed to prepare a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to various information related to the setting of the fluctuation pattern of the second special figure fluctuation display game is set. (Step A345). Thereafter, a variation pattern setting process (step A346) for setting a variation pattern which is a variation mode in the second special figure variation display game is performed, and a variation start information setting process for setting variation start information of the second special figure variation display game. (Step A347) is performed.
Next, “1” relating to the special figure changing process is set as the process number (step A348), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A349).

  Next, the customer waiting demo flag area is cleared (step A350), and a signal related to the start of fluctuation in the special figure 2 (for example, the special symbol 2 fluctuation signal is ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A351). After that, the changing flag is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step A352), and the initial value of the blinking control timer (timer of the blinking period of the special figure 2 display 51b) is saved in the special figure 2 blink control timer area. For example, 100 ms) is saved (step A353), an initial value (for example, 0) is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation symbol number area (step A354), and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process is terminated.

[Special figure changing process]
Next, the details of the special figure changing process (step A9) in the special figure game process described above will be described.
As shown in FIG. 19, in the special symbol variation processing, first, a symbol stop command corresponding to the variation symbol determination flag is prepared (step A501), and an effect command setting process (step A502) is performed.
Next, a display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern number is set (step A503), and the set display time is saved in the special figure game process timer area (step A504). In the case of this embodiment, when the stop symbol pattern is an outlier symbol pattern, 800 ms is set as the display time, and when the stop symbol pattern is a big hit symbol pattern, the display time is set as 2000 ms.
Note that when a single sitting effect is performed, the display time may be short (for example, 500 ms).
Next, “2” relating to the special figure display process is set as the process number (step A505), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A506).

  Next, a signal related to the end of change in Special Figure 1 (for example, special signal 1 changing signal OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A507), and a signal related to the end of change in Special Figure 2 (for example, special design 2) (In-change signal OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A508), and the control timer initial value is stored in the symbol determination number signal control timer area related to the number of times of execution of the special figure variable display game for output to the external information terminal (For example, 256 milliseconds) is saved (step A509). After that, as information for control of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game in the special figure 1 display 51a, a stop flag related to the fluctuation stop in the special figure 1 display 51a is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step A510). ) As the information for controlling the special figure 2 fluctuation display game in the special figure 2 display 51b, the stop flag related to the fluctuation stop in the special figure 2 display 51b is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step). A511), the special figure changing process is terminated.

[Special figure display processing]
Next, the details of the special figure display process (step A10) in the special figure game process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 20, in the special figure display process, first, the big hit flag 1 set in the big hit flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process and the big hit flag 2 setting process in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process The big hit flag 2 set in step 1 is loaded (step A601), and the RWM big hit flag 1 area and the big hit flag 2 area are cleared (step A602). Then, it is determined whether the loaded big hit flag 2 is a big hit (step A603). (For example, the condition device operating signal ON, the accessory continuous operating device operating signal ON, and the special symbol 2 signal ON) are saved in the RWM test signal output data area (step A606). A round number upper limit value table is set (step A607).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step A603 that the big hit flag 2 is not a big hit (step A603; N) as a result of checking the big hit flag 2, it is determined whether the loaded big hit flag 1 is a big hit (step A604), and the big hit (step A603). When A604; Y) is determined, a test signal related to the start of the big hit (special figure 1 big hit) of the first special figure variation display game (for example, the condition device operating signal ON, the accessory continuous operating device active signal ON, The signal per special symbol is ON) is saved in the test signal output data area of the RWM (step A605), and the round number upper limit value table is set (step A607).

  After performing the process of setting the round number upper limit table (step A607), the round number upper limit value (16R or 6R in this embodiment) corresponding to the round number upper limit information is acquired, and the round number upper limit of the RWM is obtained. Save in the value area (step A608). Subsequently, a round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is acquired and saved in the round LED pointer area of the RWM (step A609).

  Next, a decoration special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is loaded from the decoration special figure command area of the RWM, prepared (step A610), and an effect command setting process (step A613) is performed. Thereafter, a probability information command related to information for setting the probability of the winning result in the normal map variation display game and the special map variation display game to be a normal probability state (low probability state) is prepared (step A612), and an effect command setting process is performed. (Step A613) is performed. Subsequently, a fanfare command is prepared in accordance with the presence / absence of the sitting one-shot effect execution flag set in the special figure information setting process (step A614), and the effect command setting process (step A615) is performed.

Thereafter, the fanfare time is set in accordance with the presence / absence of the sitting one-shot effect execution flag (step A616), and the sitting one-shot effect execution flag is cleared (step A617). The fanfare time is set to 10000 ms when there is no sitting one-shot effect execution flag, and is set to 100 ms when there is a sitting one-shot effect execution flag.
Then, the fanfare time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A618), and the big prize opening illegal prize number area of the big prize opening (special variable prize winning device 38) corresponding to the big prize opening information is cleared ( In step A619), a fraud monitoring period non-period flag is saved in the big prize opening fraud monitoring period flag area corresponding to the big prize opening information (step A620). Thereafter, fanfare / interval process transition setting process 1 (step A621) is performed, and the special figure display process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the big hit flag 1 is not a big hit at step A604 (step A604; N), a high probability variation number update process that is a process for managing the number of special figure variation display games that can be executed in a high probability state is performed. (Step A622), “0” for the special figure normal process is set as the process number (Step A623), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (Step A624).
Next, the variable symbol discrimination flag area is cleared (step A625), the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the special prize opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A626), and the special figure displaying process is terminated.

[Normal game processing]
Next, details of the usual game process (step S110) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. In the usual game process, the input of the gate switch 34a is monitored, the whole process related to the usual figure change display game is controlled, and the display of the usual figure is set.

  As shown in FIG. 21, in the usual game process, first, a gate switch monitoring process (step B1) for monitoring the input from the gate switch 34a and the input from the start port 2 switch 37a is monitored. A monitoring process (step B2) is performed. Next, if the usual game process timer is not "0", -1 is updated (step B3). The minimum value of the usual game processing timer is set to “0”. Then, it is determined whether the value of the usual game process timer is “0” (step B4).

  When the value of the usual game process timer is “0” (step B4; Y), that is, when it is determined that the time has expired or has already expired, the process is referred to branch to the process corresponding to the ordinary game process number. A process of setting the usual game sequence branch table in the register (step B5) is performed, and a process (step B6) of acquiring the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the usual game process number is performed using the table. Then, a subroutine call is made according to the usual game process number (step B7).

In step B7, if the usual game processing number is “0”, the fluctuation start of the usual figure fluctuation display game is monitored, the fluctuation start setting of the usual figure fluctuation display game, the setting of the production, A usual-day process (step B8) for setting information necessary for the process is performed.
If the usual game process number is “1” in step B7, a usual figure changing process (step B9) for setting information necessary for performing the usual figure display process is performed.

If the normal game processing number is “2” in step B7, if the result of the normal map change display game is a win, the setting of the open time of the normal power according to whether or not the time is short is set. Or, a process for displaying a normal diagram (step B10) for setting information necessary for performing the process for normal maps is performed.
Also, if the usual game process number is “3” in step B7, the usual process for setting the information necessary to continue the usual process or to perform the ordinary electric ball remaining ball process is performed. Processing (step B11) is performed.

If the normal game process number is “4” in step B7, the general electric power remaining ball process (step B12) for setting information necessary for performing the normal game end process is performed.
If the usual game process number is “5” in step B7, the usual figure end process (step B13) for setting information necessary for performing the usual figure process is performed.

After that, after preparing a general symbol fluctuation control table for controlling the fluctuation of the normal symbol by the general symbol display 52 (step B14), the symbol variation control process related to the control of the fluctuation of the normal symbol by the general symbol display 52 ( Step B15) is performed, and the usual game process is terminated.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step B4 that the value of the usual game process timer is not “0” (step B4; N), that is, the time is not up, the process proceeds to step B14 and the subsequent processes are performed. Do.

[Usually normal processing]
Next, the details of the usual figure routine process (step B8) in the above-mentioned usual figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 22, in the usual figure normal processing, first, it is determined whether the number of usual figure holds is “0” (step B301). When the number of usual figure holds is “0” (step B301; Y) ) Sets “0” for the normal processing as the processing number (step B322), saves the processing number in the general game processing number area (step B323), and sets the processing error in the general power fraud monitoring period flag area. The flag during the monitoring period is saved (step B324), and the normal processing is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the number of reserved symbols is not “0” (step B301; N), a random number is loaded from the RWM hit random number storage area (for hold number 1) and hit symbol random number storage area (for hold number 1), The loaded area (that is, the hit random number storage area (for holding number 1), the hit symbol random number storage area (for holding number 1)) is cleared to 0 (step B302), and the hit result is obtained in the usual figure variation display game. It is determined whether the probability of the normal figure is higher than the normal probability (that is, the normal figure low probability), that is, whether the probability is in the short time state (step B303).

If the ordinary figure is not in high probability (step B303; N), a lower limit judgment value (low probability lower limit judgment value) at the time of ordinary figure low probability is set (step B304), and if the ordinary figure is in high probability (step B303). ; Y) sets a lower limit determination value (high probability lower limit determination value) at a normal probability of high probability (step B305).
Thereafter, it is determined whether the value of the hit random number is greater than or equal to the upper limit determination value (step B306). It is determined whether it is less than the set lower limit determination value (step B307).

When the value of the hit random number is greater than or equal to the upper limit determination value (step B306; Y), or when the value of the hit random number is less than the lower limit determination value set in step B304 or B305 (step B307; Y), The slip information is saved in the area (step B308), the slipping stop symbol number is set (step B309), the slipping symbol information is saved in the normal stop symbol information area (step B310), and the stop symbol number is normally stopped. Save in the symbol area (step B314).
On the other hand, if the value of the hit random number is not less than the lower limit judgment value set in step B304 or B305 (step B307; N), the hit information is saved in the hit flag area (step B311) and the hit loaded in step B302 A hit stop symbol number corresponding to the symbol random number is set (step B312), the stop symbol information corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the general symbol stop symbol information area (step B313), and the stop symbol number is set to the normal symbol stop symbol. Save in the area (step B314). In the present embodiment, two types of symbols (“hit symbol 1” and “hit symbol 2”) are prepared as the hit symbols of the ordinary symbol.

In the case of this embodiment, the hit probability at the time of the normal figure low probability is 0/251, the hit probability at the time of the normal figure high probability is 250/251, the upper limit determination value is “251”, and the low probability lower limit determination value is “251”, and the high probability lower limit determination value is “1”.
Therefore, when the normal probability is low, the hit random numbers are all in the range of “0” to “250”.
Further, when the normal probability is high, the hit random number value is “1” to “250”, and the hit random number value is “0”.

After the stop symbol number is saved in the normal symbol stop symbol area (step B314), the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step B315).
Thereafter, the winning random number storage area is shifted (step B316), the free area after the shift is cleared to 0 (step B317), and the usual figure holding number is updated by -1 (step B318). That is, in accordance with the execution of the usual map change display game relating to the oldest number of reserved maps 1, the process of moving up the ranks of the numbers 2 to 4 of the reserved maps after the number of held maps 1 by one. I do. As a result of this processing, the value for the number of reserved maps in the random number storage area from 2 to 4 is shifted from the value for the number of reserved maps in the random number storage area to 1 for the number of reserved maps in the random number storage area. Will be. Then, the value for the usual figure reservation number 4 in the random number storage area per ordinary figure is cleared, and the usual figure reservation number is decremented by one.

Next, the variation pattern random number 3 is extracted (step B319), a variation time corresponding to the variation pattern random number 3 is set, and saved in the usual game process timer area (step B320). In this embodiment, “500 msec” is set with a probability of 200/256, “1500 msec” is set with a probability of 40/256, and a probability of 16/256 is set as the change time corresponding to the change pattern random number 3. To set “3000 msec”.
Then, the normal chart process transition setting process (step B321) is performed, and the normal chart routine process is terminated.

[Processing during normal map changes]
Next, the details of the process of changing the normal map (step B9) in the above-described normal game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 23, in the process of changing the normal map, first, the process number is set to “2” for the process of displaying the normal map (step B401), and the process number is saved in the normal game process number area. (Step B402). After that, the normal time display time (for example, 600 milliseconds) which is the display time of the result of the normal time variable display game on the normal time display 52 is saved in the normal time game processing timer area (step B403), and the change of the normal time figure ends. (For example, the normal symbol 1 fluctuation signal OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step B404), and a stop flag indicating that the usual figure change display game is stopped is indicated in the usual figure fluctuation control flag area. (Step B405), and the process of changing the normal map is terminated.

[Processing during normal map display]
Next, the details of the normal map display process (step B10) in the above-described normal game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 24, in the processing for displaying a normal map, first, a hit flag (hit information or missed information) set in the normal processing is loaded (step B501), and the RWM hit flag area is cleared. (Step B502), it is determined whether the loaded hit flag is hit information (step B503).
If the winning flag is not winning information (step B503; N), the processing number is set to “0” for normal processing (step B515), and the processing number is saved in the normal game processing number area (step B515). B516), the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the ordinary power fraud monitoring period flag area (step B517), and the normal chart displaying process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the hit flag is hit information (step B503; Y), a hit processing setting table is set (step B504), and the value of the hit start pointer corresponding to the normal symbol stop symbol information (for example, “0”). ”Or“ 5 ”) is saved in the control pointer area during the normal drawing (step B505), and the value of the hit end pointer (for example,“ 4 ”,“ 7 ") is acquired and saved in the end pointer area per ordinary map (step B506). Next, a normal power release time (for example, 1700 msec or 2600 msec) corresponding to the normal map stop symbol information is acquired and saved in the normal game processing timer area (step B507).

Next, “3” is set as the process number for the normal game per process (step B508), and the process number is saved in the normal game process number area (step B509).
Next, a test signal is output for a signal related to the start of a normal-variation display game (for example, the normal signal per normal symbol is ON) and a signal for the start of normal electric operation (for example, the normal electric accessory 1 is active). The data is saved in the data area (step B510), and the on-data is saved in the general electric solenoid output data area to output a signal for driving (turning on) the normal electric solenoid (step B511).

Next, the information in the area of the general power count number for storing the number of winnings in the normal variation winning device 37 is cleared (step B512), and the number of winnings in the ordinary variable winning device 37 during the general power fraud monitoring period is stored. The information on the illegal winning number area is cleared (step B513).
Next, a flag defining the outside of the fraud monitoring period of the normal variation winning device 37 (the fraud monitoring out-of-period flag) is saved in the normal power fraud monitoring period flag area (step B514), and the normal display processing is terminated.

[Usual processing per map]
Next, the details of the process for hitting the usual figure (step B11) in the above-mentioned usual figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 25, in the normal processing per normal map, first, the control pointer during normal map is loaded and prepared (step B601), and the value of the loaded normal control pointer per normal map is greater than or equal to the upper limit value. Is determined (step B602).

If the value of the control pointer during normal maps is not equal to or greater than the upper limit value (step B602; N), the control pointer during normal maps is updated by +1 (step B603), and the power transmission operation transition setting process (step B604) is performed. Go and finish the process during the normal map.
If the value of the control pointer during normal maps is greater than or equal to the upper limit value (step B602; Y), the process for setting the transition to normal operation is not performed without performing the process of updating the control pointer during normal maps by +1 in step B603. (Step B604) is performed, and the process during the normal drawing is terminated.

[External information editing process]
Next, details of the external information editing process (step S114) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. In the external information editing process, the monitoring results in the payout command transmission process (step S105), the winning opening switch / status monitoring process (step S108), the magnet fraud monitoring process (step S112), and the panel radio wave fraud monitoring process (step S113) are displayed. Based on this, processing to create information to be output to an external device such as an information collecting terminal or a game hall internal management device or a test firing test device and set the information in an output buffer is performed.

As shown in FIGS. 26 and 27, in the external information editing process, first, it is determined whether a switch abnormality is occurring (step S801).
If it is determined in step S801 that no switch abnormality is occurring (step S801; N), off data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step S802), and the process of step S804 is performed. Migrate to
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S801 that a switch abnormality is occurring (step S801; Y), the ON data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step S803), and step S801 is performed. The process proceeds to S804.

Next, when the glass frame opening error has not occurred (step S804; N), and when the main body frame opening error has not occurred (step S805; N), the off data of the door / frame opening signal is stored in the external information output data area. Save (step S806), save the off-data of the security signal in the external information output data area (step S807), and proceed to the processing of step S810.
On the other hand, when a glass frame opening error is occurring (step S804; Y) or when a main body frame opening error is occurring (step S805; Y), the on-data of the door / frame opening signal is externally transmitted. The data is saved in the information output data area (step S808), the ON data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step S809), and the process proceeds to step S810.

If the security signal control timer that counts a predetermined time (for example, 256 milliseconds) from the time when the data stored in the RAM is initialized by operating the initialization switch or the like is updated by −1. (Step S810). Note that the initial value of the security signal control timer is set when the RAM initial value is set when the main process is started by clearing the RAM, and the minimum value of the security signal control timer is set to “0”. Then, it is determined whether the value of the security signal control timer is “0” (step S811).
When the value of the security signal control timer is not “0” (step S811; N), that is, when the time is not up, the security signal ON data is saved in the external information output data area (step S812), and step S813. Move on to processing. If the value of the security signal control timer is “0” (step S811; Y), that is, if the time is up or has already been up, the process of step S813 is not performed without performing the process of step S812. Transition.

  If a magnet fraud is occurring (step S813; Y), a board radio wave fraud is occurring (step S814; Y), a big prize opening fraud is occurring (step S815; Y), When a power transmission fraud is occurring (step S816; Y), or when a start-up port error is occurring (step S817; Y), the ON data of the gaming machine error status signal is stored in the test signal output data area. Save (step S819), save the ON data of the security signal in the external information output data area (step S820), and proceed to the processing of step S821. If the frame radio wave fraud is occurring (step S818; Y), the security signal on-data is saved in the external information output data area without performing the process of step S819 (step S820), and step S821. Move on to processing.

  On the other hand, no magnet fraud has occurred (step S813; N), no board radio wave fraud has occurred (step S814; N), no big prize opening fraud has occurred (step S815; N), and no electric power fraud has occurred. No (step S816; N), no start port error occurs (step S817; N), and no frame radio wave fraud occurs (step S818; N), the processing of step S819 and step S820 is not performed. The process proceeds to step S821.

Then, a main prize ball signal editing process (step S821) for setting information related to the number of prize balls to be paid out is performed, and a start opening signal editing process (step S822) for editing a winning signal at the start opening is performed.
Next, if the symbol determination number control timer for controlling the output time of the information related to the number of times of execution of the special figure variation display game is not “0”, −1 is updated (step S823). Note that the minimum value of the symbol determination frequency control timer is set to “0”. Then, it is determined whether the value of the symbol determination frequency control timer is “0” (step S824).

When the value of the symbol determination count control timer is “0” (step S824; Y), that is, when the time is up or has already expired, the off data of the symbol determination count signal is saved in the external information output data area. In step S825, the external information editing process ends.
On the other hand, if the value of the symbol determination count control timer is not “0” (step S824; N), that is, if the time has not expired, the on-data of the symbol determination count signal is saved in the external information output data area (step S826), the external information editing process is terminated.

  Next, control in the effect control device 300 will be described. The main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 of the effect control device 300 performs a main process shown in FIG. 28 and a timer interrupt process (not shown).

[Main processing]
As shown in FIG. 28, in the main process, the process at the start of the program is first performed. In the processing at the start of the program, first, interrupts are prohibited (step C1), and the CPU is initialized (step C2). Next, the VDP 312 is initialized (step C3), and an interrupt is permitted (step C4). Next, the generation of display data is permitted (step C5), a random number seed is set (step C6), and the initial value at power-on is saved in the area to be initialized (step C7). As a result, the power failure occurrence detected flag or the like is cleared.

  After the processing at the start of the program from steps C1 to C7, the loop processing is performed as the main loop processing. In this loop processing, first, a WDT (watchdog timer) is cleared (step C8). Next, effect button input processing (step C9) for creating input information from an input signal (rising edge) based on the operation of the effect button 25 and the touch panel 29 is performed. The input from the effect button 25 and the touch panel 29 is read in the timer interruption process. In this effect button input process, when there is an input from the effect button 25 and the touch panel 29, a process of changing the effect contents is performed.

  Then, hall / player setting mode processing is performed for accepting operations such as setting of changeable ranges such as the brightness and volume of the LED and liquid crystal, and changing the brightness and volume of the LED and liquid crystal by the player (step C10). Next, a random number update process (step C11) is performed to update a random number that determines details of the variation mode of the decoration special figure variation display game.

  Next, a received command check process (step C12) for analyzing and responding to a command from the game control device 100 is performed, and an effect display edit process (step C13) for editing settings and control for drawing commands. ) To set the end of drawing command preparation (step C14). In these processes, various data are updated in accordance with the contents to be drawn, and so on until the drawing data is finally set in the frame buffer. If drawing data of a screen to be drawn within 1/30 seconds (about 33.3 milliseconds) is prepared, the image can be updated without any problem.

  Then, it is determined whether or not it is a frame switching timing (step C15). In this embodiment, in order to create a system cycle (1 frame 1/30 seconds), it is determined that the frame switching timing is reached when the V blank interrupt (1/60 seconds) is entered twice. Note that the frame switching timing can be arbitrarily changed as appropriate. For example, image updating (frame switching) may be performed at 1/60 seconds, or image updating (frames) at a timing later than 1/60 seconds. Switching). If it is determined in step C15 that it is not the frame switching timing (step C15; N), the process of step C15 is repeated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step C15 that it is the frame switching timing (step C15; Y), screen drawing is instructed (step C16).

  After that, sound control processing (step C17) for controlling the sound output from the speakers (upper speaker 19a, lower speaker 19b), control of LEDs of the panel decoration device 46, the frame decoration device 18, the sub information display device 90, etc. The decoration control process (step C18) to be performed, the movable body control process (step C19) to control the motor and solenoid of the board effect device 44 are performed, and the process returns to the process of clearing WDT (step C8).

[Received command check processing]
FIG. 29 shows the received command check process in the main process described above. In this received command check process, first, a command reception counter value that counts how many commands are received in one frame (1/30 second) is loaded as the command reception number (step C201), and the command reception is performed. It is determined whether the number is not 0 (step C202). If it is determined that the number of received commands is 0 (step C202; N), the received command check process is terminated. If it is determined that the number of received commands is not 0 (step C202; Y), the contents of the command reception counter area are subtracted by the number of received commands (step C203).

  Next, the contents of the received command buffer are copied to the command area (step C204), the command read index is updated by +1 in the range of 0 to 31 (step C205), and the command copy for the number of received commands is completed. Is determined (step C206). As described above, in this embodiment, the command is not directly analyzed in the reception command buffer, the contents of the reception command buffer are copied to the command area (analysis RAM area), and the command analysis is performed in the command area. It is configured as follows. Thereby, in preparation for the case where a command is transmitted from the game control device 100 during the analysis of the command, it is possible to move the command (data) and create a space. In addition, command analysis can be performed collectively in a round of main processing.

  If it is determined in step C206 that the command copy for the number of received commands has not been completed (step C206; N), the process returns to step C204. If it is determined that the command copy for the number of received commands has been completed (step C206; Y), the contents of the command area are loaded (step C207), and the received command analysis process (step C208) is performed.

  Next, the address of the command area is updated (step C209), and it is determined whether or not the analysis of commands for the number of received commands is completed (step C210). If it is determined that command analysis for the number of received commands has not been completed (step C210; N), the process returns to step C207. If it is determined that the command analysis for the number of received commands has been completed (step C210; Y), the received command check process is terminated. As described above, in the received command check process, commands received during one frame (1/30 second) are collectively analyzed. In the present embodiment, up to 32 commands can be stored.

[Received command analysis processing]
FIG. 30 shows a received command analysis process in the received command check process described above. In this received command analysis process, first, the command upper byte is separated as MODE and the lower byte as ACT (ACTION) (step C231), and it is determined whether MODE and ACT are in the normal range (step C232, step C233). ). If it is determined that MODE and ACT are in the normal range (step C232; Y, step C233; Y), it is determined whether or not the ACT for MODE is a correct combination (step C234).

  Further, when it is determined in step C232 or step C233 that MODE or ACT is not in the normal range (step C232; N, step C233; N), or when it is determined in step C234 that ACT for MODE is not a correct combination (step In C234; N), the received command analysis process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step C234 that the ACT for the MODE is a correct combination (step C234; Y), it is determined whether the MODE is within the range of the variable command (step C235). The fluctuation command is a command for instructing a fluctuation pattern of a special figure. If it is determined that MODE is within the range of the variable command (step C235; Y), the variable command process (step C236) is performed, and the received command analysis process is terminated.

  When it is determined in step C235 that MODE is not in the range of the variable command (step C235; N), it is determined whether MODE is in the range of the big hit command (step C237). The jackpot command is a command for instructing an operation related to a big hit effect (display of a fanfare screen or a round screen) or a command for an operation related to a small hit effect (display of a fanfare screen or an end screen). If it is determined that MODE is within the range of the jackpot command (step C237; Y), the jackpot command processing (step C238) is performed, and the received command analysis processing is terminated.

  If it is determined in step C237 that MODE is not in the range of the jackpot command (step C237; N), it is determined whether MODE is in the design command range (step C239). The symbol-related command is a command for instructing information related to the symbol of the special symbol (for example, what is to be the stop symbol of the special symbol). When it is determined that MODE is within the range of the symbol-related command (step C239; Y), symbol-related command processing (step C240) is performed, and the received command analysis processing is terminated.

  If it is determined in step C239 that MODE is not within the range of symbol-based commands (step C239; N), it is determined whether MODE is within the range of single-shot commands such as a pending number command and an error command. (Step C241). A single command is a command that is established independently, unlike a command that makes sense in combination, such as a symbol command and a variable command. This single-shot command includes a customer waiting demo command, a hold number command, a symbol stop command, a probability information command, an error / illegal command, a model designation command, and the like. If it is determined that MODE is within the range of the single command (step C241; Y), the single command processing (step C242) is performed, and the received command analysis processing is terminated.

  If it is determined in step C241 that MODE is not in the range of the single-shot command (step C241; N), it is determined whether MODE is in the range of the pre-read symbol command (step C243). If it is determined that the MODE is within the range of the pre-read symbol command (step C243; Y), the pre-read symbol command processing (step C244) is performed, and the received command analysis processing is terminated.

  If it is determined in step C243 that MODE is not within the range of the prefetched symbol system command (step C243; N), it is determined whether or not MODE is within the range of the prefetched variation system command (step C245). If it is determined that MODE is within the range of the prefetch fluctuation command (step C245; Y), the prefetch fluctuation command processing (step C246) is performed, and the received command analysis process is terminated. If it is determined in step C245 that MODE is not within the range of the prefetch fluctuation command (step C245; N), the received command analysis process is terminated.

  Note that the prefetch variation command and the prefetch symbol command are commands including information necessary for executing the prefetch effect. Pre-reading effect (also referred to as pre-reading notice or pre-reading notice effect) is whether or not the special figure fluctuation display game corresponding to the start memory (hold) for which the special figure fluctuation display game has not been executed is subsequently executed as a big hit In order to notify the player in advance (or what variation pattern is to be obtained) with a predetermined degree of reliability, the decorative special figure start memory display or the like displayed on the display device 41 is performed in a different manner from the normal mode, or the display device 41 For example, an effect display is performed. The prefetch command (prefetch variation command and prefetch symbol command) is a command for informing a change pattern and a stop symbol corresponding to the start memory to be prefetched in advance, and from the game control device 100 at the start winning prize It is transmitted to the production control device 300. Note that normal variation commands and symbol commands that are not prefetched are transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 at the start of variation display.

[Pre-reading design command processing]
FIG. 31 shows the look-ahead symbol system command process (step C244) in the received command analysis process described above. In this pre-read symbol command processing, first, it is determined whether or not the latest hold information is the special figure 1 hold (step C301). If the latest hold information is special figure 1 hold (step C301; Y), that is, if the received prefetched symbol-related command relates to special figure 1 hold, the command corresponds to the special figure 1 hold number. 1 is saved in the prefetch symbol command area (step C302), a prefetch variation command reception waiting flag is set (step C304), and the prefetch symbol command processing is terminated.

  If the latest hold information is not special figure 1 hold (step C301; N), that is, if the received prefetched symbol-related command relates to special figure 2 hold, the command corresponds to the special figure 2 hold number. The special drawing 2 prefetched symbol command area is saved (step C303), the prefetching variation command reception waiting flag is set (step C304), and the prefetched symbol command processing is terminated. The reason why the prefetch variation command reception waiting flag is set in step C304 is that the prefetch symbol command and the prefetch variation command (prefetch variation pattern command) are set (paired).

[Read-ahead variation command processing]
FIG. 32 shows the look-ahead variation command processing (step C246) in the received command analysis processing described above. In this prefetch fluctuation command processing, first, it is determined whether or not the prefetch fluctuation command reception is awaited (step C311). Here, when there is a prefetch fluctuation command reception waiting flag set in the above-mentioned prefetch symbol system command processing, it is determined that reception is in progress. If the prefetch fluctuation command reception is not waiting (step C311; N), the prefetch fluctuation command processing is terminated. On the other hand, when the prefetch fluctuation command reception wait is in progress (step C311; Y), the prefetch fluctuation command reception wait flag is cleared (step C312).

  Thereafter, in the processes of steps C313 to C316, a process of converting the prefetch fluctuation command (prefetch fluctuation pattern command) received from the game control apparatus 100 so as to be convenient for the process in the effect control apparatus 300 is performed. First, a process (step C313) for setting a prefetch variation MODE conversion table corresponding to the number of retained symbols in the latest pending information is performed (step C313), and information on the special type of start memory corresponding to the prefetch variation command received this time A MODE conversion table for converting the MODE is set in accordance with the current number of reservations of the special figure type.

  Next, referring to the set MODE conversion table, the sub-in-prefetch variation command MODE corresponding to the prefetch variation command MODE is acquired (step C314). Further, a prefetch variation ACT conversion table is set (step C315), and the sub-in-prefetch conversion command ACT corresponding to the ACT of the prefetch variation command is acquired (step C316).

  The MODE contains information on the first half fluctuation, but since the contents and time of the first half fluctuation set based on this MODE vary depending on the number of holds at the time of judgment, the judgment at the time of prior judgment and the start of the special figure fluctuation display game The determination result may differ depending on the determination of time. Therefore, in order to enable easy and reliable processing of the pre-reading notice effect without being influenced by the number of holds at the time of determination, MODE is converted in a conversion mode according to the current number of holds, and at the time of determination It can be handled in common regardless of the number of holds. For example, there is a possibility of a short first fluctuation time depending on the hold situation without reach and a short first fluctuation time depending on the hold situation. It is converted into MODE divided according to matters to be considered in the setting of the prefetching notice effect, so that the process of the prefetching notice effect can be performed easily and reliably.

  In addition, the ACT includes information on the latter half fluctuation such as the presence / absence of reach and the type of reach. The content of the latter-half fluctuation set based on this ACT does not change depending on the number of holds at the time of determination. However, for example, even in the case of normal reach, there are various aspects of the same type of reach, such as the case where the final stop symbol is set to the stop that stops one frame before the reach symbol, the stop that stops one frame ahead, and the winning case. Since the ACT corresponding to each of these is set, the range of values is wide. For this reason, the number of ACTs corresponding to the reach of the same system is converted to the same ACT, thereby reducing the number and reducing the processing load such as the check in the pre-reading notice effect processing.

  Next, it is determined whether both MODE and ACT after conversion are other than 0 (step C317). If neither MODE nor ACT after conversion is other than 0 (step C317; N), the prefetch fluctuation command processing is terminated because of an abnormal command value. On the other hand, when the converted MODE and ACT are both other than 0 (step C317; Y), the converted command is saved in the latest hold information and the look-ahead variable command area corresponding to the number of holds (step C318), and MODE And pre-read command consistency check processing (step C319) for determining whether the combination of ACT and command (command combination) is normal.

  If the command combination is not normal (step C320; N) as a result of the prefetch command matching check process (step C319), the prefetch variation command process is terminated. On the other hand, if the command combination is normal (step C320; Y), a prefetch lottery process (step C321) for lottery execution of the prefetch notice effect is performed to determine whether a prefetch notice effect is generated (step C322).

  When no pre-reading notice effect is generated (step C322; N), the pre-reading variation command processing is terminated. On the other hand, when the prefetching notice effect is generated (step C322; Y), is the prefetching notice effect that is generated (that is, the prefetching notice effect selected in the prefetch lottery process (step C321)) immediately started? Is determined (step C323). The effect that starts immediately is, for example, a pending change notice that changes the display mode of the decorative special figure start memory display displayed on the display device 41 from the present time. An effect that does not start immediately is a pre-reading notice effect that is performed during the execution of a special figure fluctuation display game, which produces a specific effect or reach state continuously over a plurality of special figure fluctuation display games. For example, an effect of giving a notice by a character appearing during the display, a pending change notice for changing the display mode of the decorative special figure start memory display at a timing later than the present time, and the like. The timing of starting the execution of such an effect that does not start immediately is that the special figure fluctuation display game is ended if the special figure fluctuation display game is being executed, and the execution of the next special figure fluctuation display game is started. Applicable timing.

  If the effect is not to start immediately (step C323; N), the prefetch fluctuation command processing is terminated. In this case, a notice is set at the start of a special figure change display game that executes a prefetch notice effect. On the other hand, if the effect is to start immediately (step C323; Y), the display corresponding to the selected prefetching notice effect is set (step C324), and the prefetching variation command processing is terminated.

[Variable command processing]
FIG. 33 shows the variable command process (step C236) in the received command analysis process described above. In this variable command processing, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure type is unconfirmed (step C361). The special figure type is information indicating whether the special figure type is special figure 1 or special figure 2, and is information set in step C251 of the above-described symbol system command processing.

  If this special figure type is unconfirmed (step C361; Y), the variable command processing is terminated. When the special figure type is not yet determined (step C361; N), that is, when the special figure type is set, the combination of the variation command and the symbol command is checked (step C362), and the variation command and the symbol type are determined. It is determined whether they are inconsistent (step C363).

  When the variation command and the symbol type are inconsistent (step C363; Y), the variation command processing is terminated. If the variation command and the symbol type are not inconsistent (step C363; N), the variation pattern type is determined from the variation command (step C364). The symbol type means a symbol category. For example, the symbol type includes, for example, an off symbol, 16R probability variation A big hit symbol, 16R probability variation B big hit symbol, 16R normal A big hit symbol, 16R normal B big hit symbol, 4R probability variable big hit symbol, small There are winning designs. When the variation command and the symbol type are inconsistent, the effect is the same as when the symbol command of the 16R probability variation A big hit symbol is received although the variation command (variation pattern command) of the deviation is received. It means a combination (a combination of a variation command and a symbol type) that conflicts with the above.

  In the process of determining the variation pattern type from the variation command (step C364), the variation pattern type, which is a rough classification of the variation display effect of the special figure, is determined according to the received command. Then, variation effect setting processing for setting information for performing an effect according to the variation command is performed (step C365).

  Next, the special figure changing state is set as the P machine state (pachinko machine state) (step C366). Here, during the special map change, the special map is changing (not during a customer waiting demonstration, during a big hit, or during a fanfare, etc.). Further, if the number of pre-reading effects (the number of pre-reading executions) is not zero, the number of pre-reading effects is updated by −1 (a process of reducing the number of pre-reading effects by 1) (step C367), and the variable command process is terminated.

[Variation production setting processing]
FIG. 34 shows the changing effect setting process (step C365) in the above-described changing command process. In this variation effect setting process, first, it is determined whether the variation pattern type is unreachable variation (step C381). If the variation pattern type is unreachable variation (step C381; Y), the first half notice allocation group address table corresponding to the model code and special figure type and the presenting mode is set (step C382). In addition, since it is a change without reach, the symbol type is always an out-of-sequence symbol, and there is no need to particularly refer to the symbol type here. The production mode corresponds to the game mode managed by the production control device 300 and naturally varies depending on the model, but here, there are a normal mode, a probability change mode, a time reduction mode, a latent mode, and the like. Furthermore, in each mode, a plurality of modes in which the distribution ratio of the notice effect and the effect mode of the decoration special figure variation display game in the display device 41 are different are provided.

  Next, referring to the first-half notice allocation group address table, the address of the first-order notice allocation group table corresponding to the number of MODE and special figure types is acquired (step C383). As a result, in the case of fluctuation without reach, it is possible to change the lottery contents of the notice effects that appear during each change (specifically, the appearance rate of each notice effect mode) according to the number of holds. Thereafter, a lottery for a notice appearing during the first half fluctuation is performed using the first half notice allocation group table (step C386).

  On the other hand, if the variation pattern type is not reachless variation (step C381; N), the first half notice allocation group address table corresponding to the model code, special figure type, presentation mode and symbol type is set (step C384). Then, referring to the first half notice allocation group address table, the address of the first half notice distribution group table corresponding to the MODE and the variation pattern type is acquired (step C385), and the first half notice distribution group table is used to change the first half. The lottery for the advance notice appearing is performed (step C386).

  Next, the notice effect of the second half change is drawn. Note that the latter half of the special figure fluctuation display game is a so-called reach action (for example, a special result mode (a special combination of symbols) in which a display area excluding a specific area out of a plurality of display areas of the special figure is a big hit) Is a variable display in a state in which the variable is displayed only in a specific area. On the other hand, the first half fluctuation of the special figure fluctuation display game is a fluctuation display before the start of the reach action.

  First, a second half notice allocation group address table corresponding to the model code, special figure type, effect mode, and symbol type is set (step C387). The second half notice distribution group address table is a table for selecting an address of the second half notice distribution group table. Then, the second half notice allocation group table address corresponding to the ACT is obtained by referring to the second half notice distribution group address table (step C388), and the second half notice distribution group table is used to change the second half (during reach). A lottery for notice of appearance is performed (step C389).

  Thereafter, the contents of the variable effects corresponding to MODE and ACT are determined (step C390), and the contents of the effects corresponding to the notice lottery result are determined (step C391). As a result, effects such as the variation time and main reach contents of the decoration special figure variation display game, the advance notice, the display mode of the running storage display unit 84, and the like are determined.

  Next, stop symbol setting processing for determining a stop symbol with reference to the determined variation pattern (reach effect etc.) of the special symbol variation display game and the notice content is performed (step C392). Next, the display setting of the fluctuating effect is performed (step C393), and the display setting of the notice effect is performed (step C394). With these processes, it is possible to execute effects and notices in the decorative special figure variation display game set as described above. Thereafter, the display setting of the hold reduction corresponding to the special figure type is performed (step C395). In this process, a setting is made to decrease the decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the decrease of the start memory corresponding to the start of the special figure variation display game.

  Then, a sound number that is a BGM number and a decoration number that is a number indicating the type of effect produced by a decoration lamp or the like are set (step C396), and a decoration special figure variation (variation display of identification information) corresponding to the special figure type is set. Display setting is performed (step C397). Furthermore, in the sub information display device 90, in order to set the variation display of the fourth symbol for displaying the decoration special symbol variation display game separately from the variation display of the identification information, the display of the fourth symbol variation corresponding to the special symbol type is set. Settings are made (step C398), and the variation effect setting process is terminated.

35 and 36 show part of the contents of the variation group table and the variation pattern selection table in the present embodiment. When determining the variation pattern (variation mode), the game control apparatus 100 uses the variation group table and the variation pattern selection table as the variation pattern table.
FIG. 35 shows a part of the contents of the variation group table and the variation pattern selection table when the result is a big hit.
FIG. 35A shows a variation group table in the case where the effect mode is the normal effect mode, that is, the “normal probability state” and the “non-short-time state”.

The variation group (variation pattern selection table) that can be selected by the variation group table includes a normal reach system, an SP0 reach system, an SP1 reach system, an SP2 reach system, an SP3 reach system, and a full-rotation reach system. Has been.
The variation group is selected by the selected variation group table and the variation pattern random number 1. The variation pattern random number 1 takes a value of 0 to 65535. For example, 2008 values are assigned to the normal reach system when the result is a 16R probability variation A big hit. That is, when the result is 16R probability variation A big hit, a normal reach type variation group is selected with a probability of 2008/65536.

FIG. 35B shows the contents of a normal reach variation pattern selection table used when a normal reach variation group is selected in the variation group table of FIG.
The variation patterns that can be selected by this variation pattern selection table include three variation patterns with variation patterns of 77 to 79, all of which are normal reach, and a distribution value is set for each.
The variation pattern is selected by the selected variation pattern selection table and the variation pattern random number 2. The variation pattern random number 2 takes a value of 0 to 255. For example, 216 values are assigned to the variation pattern number 77. That is, the variation pattern with variation pattern number 77 is selected with a probability of 216/256.

FIG. 36 shows a part of the contents of the variation group table and the variation pattern selection table when the result is out of place.
FIG. 36A shows a variation group table in the case where the effect mode is the normal effect mode, that is, the “normal probability state” and the “non-short-time state”.
The fluctuation groups (fluctuation pattern selection table) that can be selected by this fluctuation group table include normal fluctuation (no reach) 1 system, normal fluctuation (no reach) 2 system, normal reach system, SP0 reach system, SP2 reach system, SP3 reach. There is a system.

FIG. 36B shows a normal variation (no reach) 1 system variation pattern selection table used when a normal variation (no reach) system 1 variation group is selected in the variation group table of FIG. The contents of were shown.
The variation patterns that can be selected by the variation pattern selection table include three variation patterns with variation pattern numbers 2 to 4 that are all without reach. When the total number of holdings (starting memory number) in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is 0 to 2 and 3, the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation pattern number 2 (the fluctuation pattern of the ultra-short fluctuation with the shortest fluctuation time) ) Is not selected, and when the sum of the number of holdings in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is 4 to 6 and 7 to 8, the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation pattern number 2 (the fluctuation time is the longest). It is possible to select a fluctuation pattern of short ultrashort fluctuation. In addition, when the total number of holdings of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is 7 to 8, the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation pattern number 2 (the fluctuation pattern of the super shortening fluctuation with the shortest fluctuation time) is most easily selected. Yes. For example, the case where the total number of holds in Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2 is 0 is a case where a prize is awarded in a state where the total number of holds is 0 (for example, waiting for customers).

<Prediction production>
The gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment can execute a precursor effect using the board effect device 44 and the display device 41. This precursor effect is a kind of prefetch notice effect that suggests a prefetch result, and starts and ends during the fluctuation display of one special figure fluctuation display game. In the present embodiment, as the sign effect, the movable accessory 44a of the board effect device 44 is operated, and the effect of switching the display mode of the decoration special figure start memory display displayed on the display device 41 in conjunction with the operation. Execute.
FIG. 37 shows an example of a timing chart when the precursor effect is executed. 38 and 39 show an example of the operation of the movable accessory 44a and the display on the display device 41 at that time.

As shown in [a] of FIG. 38, a decoration special figure variation display game display section 41a for displaying a decoration special figure variation display game is provided in the center of the display area of the display device 41. The decorative special figure fluctuation display game display unit 41a executes the decorative special figure fluctuation display game by displaying the decoration special symbols (identification information) in each of the left, middle, and right fluctuation display areas after being variably displayed.
In addition, a standby hold display unit 41b for displaying a decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to unstarted start memory is provided at the lower part of the display area of the display device 41. The decorative special figure start memory display displayed on the standby hold display unit 41b has a one-to-one correspondence with the start memory and is arranged in the storage order. The decoration special figure start memory display at the left end is a decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the start memory (first start memory or second start memory) stored first, and shifts to the left (shift) every time it is digested. ). In addition, it is possible to suggest a result of pre-reading such as a special figure variation display game result and a variation pattern based on each start memory by a display mode of the corresponding decorative special figure start memory display.

  On the left side of the standby hold display unit 41b, an on-hold hold display unit 41c that displays information related to the start-up memory during digestion (start-up memory corresponding to the currently executed special figure variation display game) is provided. The on-hold hold display unit 41c is configured to shift (shift) the decorative special figure start memory display at the left end of the standby hold display unit 41b at the start of the special figure change display game. In addition, it is possible to suggest the result of the special figure variation display game being executed, the variation pattern, and the like by the display mode of the decorative special figure start memory display displayed on the on-hold display unit 41c.

In addition, a small symbol that is relatively smaller than the special ornament symbol (identification symbol) that is variably displayed on the ornament special symbol variation display game display unit 41 a is displayed at the corner (for example, the upper left corner) of the display area of the display device 41. A small symbol variation display unit 41d is provided.
In addition, a number holding display unit 41e that displays the number of undigested start-up memories in numbers is provided at the corner (for example, the upper right corner) of the display area of the display device 41. In addition, as shown in FIG. 38, FIG. 52, etc., the number hold display section 41e may display the total number of undigested first start memories and undigested second start memories. As shown in FIG. 65, the number of undigested first start memories and the number of undigested second start memories may be displayed separately.

As shown in [a] of FIG. 38, the board effect device 44 includes a movable accessory 44a having a shape imitating an ally character having a spear. For example, the movable accessory 44a can move up and down between a display area of the display device 41 and a position that does not overlap with the front and rear, and in a state where it does not overlap with the display area of the display device 41. It is configured to be movable to the left and right, and to be movable to the left and right while overlapping the display area of the display device 41 in the front-rear direction.
Here, the position where the display area of the display device 41 does not overlap with the front and rear (a state where it does not overlap) is the position where the majority (for example, more than half) of the movable accessory 44a does not overlap the display area with the front and rear (a state where it does not overlap). is there. The position overlapping the display area of the display device 41 in the front-rear direction (overlapping state) is a position (overlapping state) where the majority (for example, half or more) of the movable accessory 44a overlaps the display area in the front-rear direction.

In the present embodiment, a movable accessory is displayed as a specific decorative special figure start memory display (hereinafter referred to as “specific special display”) among the decorative special figure start storage displays displayed on the standby hold display unit 41b as a precursor effect. 44a is operated, and the effect of whether or not the display mode of the specific hold display is changed to the suggested mode by the action of the movable accessory 44a on the specific hold display is executed.
Here, by displaying the decorative special figure start memory display displayed on the standby hold display section 41b in a suggestion manner, the result of the special figure fluctuation display game based on the corresponding start memory and the prefetch result such as the fluctuation pattern are suggested. can do. Further, by displaying the decoration special figure start memory display displayed on the on-hold display unit 41c in a suggestion manner, it is possible to suggest the result of the special figure fluctuation display game being executed, the fluctuation pattern, and the like.

  In the present embodiment, the display mode of the specific hold display is changed to a display mode imitating an enemy character at a predetermined timing (in the case of the present embodiment, at the start of the precursor effect), and then the specific hold is performed. Although it comprises so that the movable accessory 44a may be made to act on a display (in the case of this embodiment, it stabs a heel), it is not limited to this. For example, the display mode of the specific hold display may not change to a display mode imitating an enemy character.

As shown in FIG. 37, when the variation display of the special figure variation display game is started, the production control device 300 starts a hold shift production in which the decorative special figure start memory display is shifted to the next (t11). Specifically, as shown in [A] of FIG. 38, when the special figure variation display game is finished, and as shown in [A] of FIG. The start memory display shifts to the left.
Next, as shown in FIG. 37, when the special figure fluctuation display game of this time is a special figure fluctuation display game won in the lottery of the sign effect, the sign control device 300 displays the sign when the hold shift effect ends. Production starts (t12).
The sign production lottery is a lottery for deciding whether or not to execute the sign production, and when the sign production lottery is won, the sign production is executed during the variation display of the winning special figure variation display game. The The lottery of the sign effect is performed, for example, in the notice lottery (step C386 or step C389) of the variable effect setting process (FIG. 34).

When the warning effect starts, first, as shown in [c] of FIG. 38, the display mode of the specific hold display changes from the normal display mode to a display mode imitating an enemy character, and the movable accessory 44a The display area moves from an initial position (first position) that does not overlap the display area to the position (second position) that overlaps the display area.
Next, as shown in [D] of FIG. 39, the movable accessory 44a overlaps the display area in the front-rear direction (that is, in front of the display area). To the position where the movable accessory 44a can act on the specific hold display (third position). The movable accessory 44a may be capable of, for example, swinging down the heel. In this case, if the heel is swung down with the movable accessory 44a arriving at the operating position, the tip of the heel is moved. You may comprise so that it may overlap with a specific hold display.

Next, the specific hold display is a decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the start memory won in the lottery of the standby hold change effect (an effect that suggests a pre-read result by changing the display mode of the decorative special figure start memory display). In this case, as shown in [e] in FIG. 39, the display mode of the specific hold display is changed from the display mode imitating the enemy character to the suggestion mode, and the precursor effect is ended. On the other hand, when the specific hold display is a decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the start memory that is lost in the lottery of the standby hold change effect, the display mode of the specific hold display does not change to the suggestion mode (that is, While the display mode imitating the enemy character is maintained, or the display mode imitating the enemy character is returned to the normal display mode), the indication effect ends.
The lottery of the standby hold change effect is a lottery for determining whether or not to execute the standby hold change effect, and when the lottery of the standby hold change effect is won, the decorative special figure start corresponding to the winning start memory is won The display mode of the memory display changes to the suggestion mode at a predetermined timing. The lottery of the standby hold change effect is performed, for example, in the prefetch lottery process (step C321) of the prefetch fluctuation system command process (FIG. 32).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 37, when the precursor effect is finished, the effect control device 300 starts the accessory return effect in which the movable accessory 44a returns to the initial position (first position) (t13). Specifically, as shown in [F] of FIG. 39, the movable accessory 44a moves from the action position (third position) overlapping with the display area to the front and rear to the position (fourth position) not overlapping. Next, the movable accessory 44a moves from the fourth position to the initial position (first position) without overlapping the display area.

  Thus, the sign effect is executed during the variable display of the special figure variable display game. Therefore, if the execution time of the precursor effect is longer than the change time of the special figure variation display game, the end timing of the precursor effect is later than the variation end timing of the special figure variation display game. Thus, inconveniences such as an effect that is scheduled to be executed after the end of the change cannot be executed as scheduled. Therefore, in the conventional gaming machine, when the variation time of the special figure variation display game won in the lottery of the sign effect is shorter than the execution time of the sign effect, the control for canceling the execution of the sign effect or the sign Control was performed to end the production in the middle. Therefore, in this embodiment, in order not to cause inconvenience such as that the effect scheduled to be executed after the end of the fluctuation cannot be performed as scheduled without performing such control, the execution time of the sign effect is Shorten the variation time of the special figure variation display game.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 37, the execution time (t12 to t13) of the warning effect is started when the sum of the number of holdings of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is the upper limit number. It is shorter than the fluctuation time (t11 to t14) of the fluctuation display game. There are various fluctuation times of the special figure fluctuation display game, but the special fluctuation figure display game with the shortest fluctuation time among the special figure fluctuation display games that can be won in the lottery of the prelude effect, the result is out of place and the fluctuation pattern reaches The special figure that is started when the total number of reserved figures in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is the upper limit number (8 in the case of the present embodiment). This is a variable display game (see FIG. 36B). Therefore, in the present embodiment, the execution time value of the warning effect is a special figure fluctuation display game that is executed in the normal presentation mode with the result being out of sync and the fluctuation pattern being not reached, and the number of reserved figures in FIG. 1 and FIG. Is set to be smaller than the fluctuation time value of the special figure fluctuation display game (hereinafter referred to as “pending MAX fluctuation”) that is started when the total is the upper limit number. Thus, regardless of the number of unsettled start memories at the time of starting the special figure variation display game (the total number of suspensions of special figure 1 and special figure 2), the end timing of the warning effect is changed in the special figure fluctuation display game. It is before the end timing. In other words, the sign effect can be executed (executed from the beginning to the end) in any special figure variation display game.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the variation display of the special figure variation display game is started, the hold shift effect in which the decorative special figure start memory display is shifted to the next side is started, and when the hold shift effect is ended, the precursor effect is started. In other words, in the present embodiment, execution of the sign effect is prohibited during the hold shift effect, and the sign effect starts after the start of the fluctuation. Therefore, even if the execution time of the warning effect is made shorter than the change time of the pending MAX fluctuation, depending on the length of the execution time of the warning effect and the start timing of the warning effect, the end timing of the warning effect may be displayed in the special figure fluctuation display game. In some cases, it is later than the fluctuation end timing.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 37, even if the precursor effect is started after the hold shift effect, the end timing of the precursor effect is preceded by the change end timing of the special figure variation display game, as shown in FIG. The time from the start of the hold shift effect to the end of the precursor effect (t11 to t13) is made shorter than the change time (t11 to t14) of the hold MAX change. That is, the sum of the execution time value of the hold shift effect and the execution time value of the precursor effect is set smaller than the change time value of the hold MAX fluctuation.
The sum of the execution time value of the hold shift effect and the execution time value of the precursor effect may be set to be the same as the change time value of the hold MAX change. From the standpoint of avoiding inconveniences such as being difficult to see with the object 44a, it is preferable that the movable accessory 44a does not overlap the display area of the display device 41 at the end of the variation display of the special figure variation display game. Also, from the viewpoint of avoiding inconvenience such as it becomes difficult to understand that the result mode of the decoration special figure variation display game is stopped and displayed, at the end of the variation display of the special figure variation display game, the display mode of the specific hold display The switching (change) is preferably completed.

  Furthermore, when the precursor effect is finished, the accessory return effect in which the movable accessory 44a returns to the initial position (first position) is started. In the case of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 37, the accessory return effect ends after the timing (t15) at which the next special figure variation display game starts. It is possible to make the timing at which the accessory return effect ends to be the same as the timing at which the next special figure fluctuation display game starts or before the timing at which the next special figure fluctuation display game starts, By setting the timing at which the accessory return effect ends to be later than the timing at which the next special figure variation display game starts, it is possible to sufficiently secure the execution time of the sign effect.

The sign effect is not limited to the one using the board effect device 44 and the display device 41, and can be changed as appropriate. The frame decoration device 18, the speakers 19a and 19b, the display device 41, the sub display device 42, and the board effect device. 44, the board decoration device 46, etc. may be used.
For example, instead of the movable accessory 44a of the board effect device 44, a character image G1 of a teammate character having a spear may be displayed on the display device 41, and the character image G1 may be applied to the specific hold display. An example is shown in FIG.

  When the precursor effect starts, first, a character image G1 appears in the display area of the display device 41, as shown in FIG. Next, as shown in [h] of FIG. 40, the character image G1 moves to a position where it can act on the specific hold display (action position). Next, when the specific hold display is a decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the start memory won in the lottery of the standby hold change effect, as shown in [su] of FIG. 40, the display of the specific hold display The aspect changes to the suggestion aspect, and the sign production ends. On the other hand, when the specific hold display is a decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the start memory that was lost in the lottery of the standby hold change effect, the display mode of the specific hold display does not change to the suggestion mode, but the sign The production ends. Then, when the sign effect is finished, a character exit effect (effect corresponding to an accessory return effect) in which the character image G1 leaves the action position is started. As a result, the character image G1 disappears from the display area.

Note that the timing for starting the display of the character image G1 can be changed as appropriate. For example, the character image G1 may appear before the start of the sign effect.
Further, from the viewpoint of avoiding inconveniences such as it becomes difficult to understand that the result mode of the decoration special figure fluctuation display game is stopped and displayed, the character image G1 is also stopped and displayed during the stop display of the special figure fluctuation display game. It is preferable. Therefore, the timing for starting the character exit effect is preferably after the stop display of the special figure variation display game is completed (for example, at the start of the next special figure fluctuation display game).

In addition, the character image displayed on the display device 41 instead of the movable accessory 44a of the board effect device 44 is not limited to the character image G1 of the teammate character with the heel and can be changed as appropriate. Further, the way of movement of the character image G1 can be changed as appropriate.
In addition, the shape of the movable accessory 44a is not limited to the shape imitating an ally character with a spear and can be changed as appropriate. Moreover, the way of movement of the movable accessory 44a can be changed as appropriate.
For example, as shown in FIG. 41A, a cover member 40a may be provided in front of the movable accessory 44a that does not overlap the display area of the display device 41. In this case, for example, as shown in the upper diagram of FIG. 41A, when the movable accessory 44a is not overlapped with the display area of the display device 41, the entire movable accessory 44a (or Half or more) are hidden by the cover member 44a and become invisible (difficult to see). On the other hand, for example, as shown in the lower diagram of FIG. 41 (a), when the movable accessory 44a overlaps the display area of the display device 41 in the front-rear direction, the entire movable accessory 44a (or more than half). However, it becomes visible without being hidden by the cover member 44a.

If a plurality of precursor effects with different execution time values can be executed, all the execution time values of the plurality of precursor effects may be set smaller than the fluctuation time value of the pending MAX fluctuation, Only a part of the execution time values of the plurality of precursor effects may be set smaller than the fluctuation time value of the pending MAX fluctuation.
FIG. 41B shows an example in which only a part of the execution time values among the plurality of precursor effects is set smaller than the fluctuation time value of the pending MAX fluctuation.

  As shown in FIG. 41 (b), it is possible to execute a precursor effect A with an execution time of 2 seconds, a precursor effect B with an execution time of 3 seconds, and a precursor effect C with an execution time of 8 seconds. The sign effect that the execution time value is smaller than the change time value of the special figure change display game won in the lottery is executed. That is, when the special figure fluctuation display game won in the lottery of the sign effect is a super shortened fluctuation (fluctuation time 4 seconds) or a shortened fluctuation (fluctuation time 8 seconds) shown in FIG. The special fluctuation display game selected from A and the warning presentation B is executed during the fluctuation display of the special figure fluctuation display game, and the lottery of the prelude presentation is selected. The normal fluctuation shown in FIG. (Variation time 13.6 seconds), etc., the sign effect selected from the sign effect A, the sign effect B and the sign effect C is executed during the variable display of the special figure variable display game. May be.

Of course, in this case as well, the sign effect is such that the sum of the execution time value of the hold shift effect and the effect time value of the sign effect is smaller than the change time value of the special figure variable display game won in the lottery of the sign effect. It is also possible to select.
In addition, when the special figure fluctuation display game won in the lottery of the sign effect is the pending MAX change, the sign effect having the shortest execution time may be executed. That is, in the example shown in FIG. 41 (b), when the special figure fluctuation display game won in the sign presentation lottery is a super shortening fluctuation (pending MAX fluctuation in the present embodiment) with a fluctuation time of 4 seconds, Only the effect A may be selectable, and the sign effect B and the sign effect C may not be selected.

Further, when continuously executing the precursor effect over a plurality of special figure fluctuation display games, all the execution time values of the plurality of precursor effects continuously executed are smaller than the change time value of the pending MAX fluctuation. It may be set, or only a part of execution time values among a plurality of precursor effects that are continuously executed may be set to be smaller than the fluctuation time value of the pending MAX fluctuation.
In addition, since the prelude effect that is executed for the first time among the plurality of predecessor effects that are continuously executed is more likely to be executed during the pending MAX fluctuation than the predictor effect that is executed after the second time, When only a part of the execution time values among the plurality of precursor effects that are continuously executed is set to be smaller than the fluctuation time value of the pending MAX fluctuation, the execution time value of the precursor effect executed at least for the first time is set, It is preferable to set smaller than the fluctuation time value of the pending MAX fluctuation.

  In addition, the effect control device 300 of the present embodiment can execute the decoration special figure variation display game in a pseudo-variable variation mode in which the unit variation display that temporarily stops after the identification information is variably displayed is performed a plurality of times and the result mode is derived. However, if there is a value that is smaller than the variation time value at the time of the hold MAX among the variation time values of the unit variation display in the pseudo-continuous variation mode, the execution time value of the indication effect is expressed as the unit in the pseudo-variable variation mode. It is also possible to set it smaller than any one of the fluctuation time values of the fluctuation display (for example, the fluctuation time value of the unit fluctuation display having the shortest fluctuation time).

In addition, it is also possible to execute a precursor effect whose execution time is shorter than the temporary stop time (the time between the unit variation display and the next unit variation display) in the pseudo continuous variation mode. An example is shown in FIG.
In the decorative special figure variation display game in the pseudo-continuous variation mode, for example, as shown in [t] in FIG. 42, the first unit variation display in the pseudo-continuous variation mode is finished, and is shown in [h] in FIG. As described above, a special pattern (for example, “ream”) that appears only during the pseudo continuous variation among the decorative special symbols (identification information) displayed in each of the left, middle, and right variation display areas is included. Only the symbol (composed symbol) remains, and it is informed that the pseudo continuous variation is in progress, and thereafter, the second unit variation display is started as shown in FIG. In this case, the sign effect is executed while the fact that the pseudo-continuous change is in progress is notified. Specifically, for example, as shown in [h] of FIG. 42, the character image G1 (or the movable accessory 44a or the like) moves to the action position while the fact that the pseudo continuous change is being notified. . That is, the character image G1 (or the movable accessory 44a or the like) acts on the specific hold display while the fact that the pseudo continuous change is being notified. 42, when the second unit fluctuation display is started, the character image G1 (or the movable accessory 44a or the like) leaves the action position.

Further, the character image that acts on the specific hold display may be a character image that constitutes a decorative special symbol. FIG. 43 shows an example of the case where the character image constituting the decoration special symbol acts on the specific hold display in the indication effect whose execution time is shorter than the temporary stop time in the pseudo continuous variation mode.
For example, as shown in [n] in FIG. 43, the pseudo-ream dedicated symbol is composed of a character image (for example, a character image “ream”) and a character image (for example, an image imitating an umbrella). Then, as shown in [D] of FIG. 43, while the fact that the pseudo continuous change is being informed is made, the character images constituting the pseudo continuous dedicated symbol act on the specific hold display. When the specific hold display is a decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the start memory won in the lottery of the standby hold change effect, as shown in [nu] in FIG. The display mode changes to the suggested mode.
Of course, not only a prelude effect (a prelude effect whose execution time is shorter than the temporary stop time) executed during the temporary stop time in the pseudo-continuous variation mode, but also a prelude effect executed during the change display of the special figure change display game ( In the sign effect etc. in which the execution time is shorter than the fluctuation time of the hold MAX fluctuation, the character image constituting the decorative special symbol may be applied to the specific hold display instead of the movable accessory 44a and the character image G1.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, although the display whether the display mode of the decoration special figure starting memory display currently displayed on the waiting hold | maintenance display part 41b changes to a suggestion as a precursor production | presentation is performed, It is not limited. The precursor effect may be, for example, an effect as to whether or not the display mode of the decorative special figure start memory display displayed on the on-hold display unit 41c is changed to the suggestion mode.

  As described above, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a variable display game (special figure variable display game) that displays a plurality of identification information in a variable manner based on the establishment of the start condition is executed, and the result of the variable display game is A starting machine that generates a special gaming state that gives a player a gaming value when a special result is obtained, and that extracts a predetermined random number based on the establishment of the starting condition and stores it as a starting memory of a variable display game Means (game control device 100) and effect control means (effect control device 300) for executing a predetermined notice effect (prediction effect) during execution of the variable display game, and the execution time value of the predetermined notice effect is More than the variation time value of the variation display game (pending MAX variation) started when the number of the start memories stored in the start storage means has reached the predetermined upper limit number (8 in this embodiment). small

  Therefore, since the execution time of the sign effect is shorter than the change time of the pending MAX change (that is, the special figure change display game with the shortest change time), the notice effect (prediction effect) is executed in any change display game. Can do.

  Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the effect control means (the effect control device 300) is configured so that a predetermined time elapses after the start of the variable display game (special figure variable display game) (in the case of the present embodiment, the hold shift). The predetermined notice effect (prediction effect) is started after the effect is finished), and the sum of the execution time value of the predetermined notice effect and the value of the predetermined time (in this embodiment, the execution time value of the hold shift effect) Is a variable display game (pending MAX fluctuation) that is started when the number of start memories stored in the start memory means (game control means 100) has reached a predetermined upper limit number (8 in this embodiment). ) To be smaller than the variation time value.

By configuring in this way, since the precursor effect starts after the start of the special figure display game, it is possible to provide a period during which the player does not execute the precursor effect while expecting the player to execute the precursor effect. It becomes possible to enhance the interest of the game.
The sign effect may be started at the start of the special figure variation display game.

  Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the effect control means (the effect control device 300) can control the operation of the movable accessory 44a used for the predetermined notice effect (prediction effect), and the predetermined notice effect. Later, a return effect for returning the movable accessory 44a to the initial position (act return effect) can be executed, and the return effect is later than the variable display game (special drawing variable display game) in which the predetermined notice effect is executed. It can be configured to end during execution of the starting variable display game.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to sufficiently secure the execution time of the sign effect.
The special figure variation display game that is being executed when the accessory return effect is ended is not limited to the special figure variation display game that is executed next to the special figure variation display game in which the precursor effect is executed.
Further, the accessory return effect may be ended during the execution of the special figure change display game in which the precursor effect is executed (including the end of the special figure change display game in which the precursor effect is executed).

  Further, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a variable display game (special figure variable display game) that displays a plurality of pieces of identification information based on winning of a game ball in the start winning area is executed, and the variable display game In which a special gaming state that gives a player a gaming value when the result is a special result, the start prize area is a first start prize area (first start prize port 36), And a second start winning area (second start winning opening 97, normal variation winning apparatus 37), extracting a predetermined random number based on the winning of a game ball to the first start winning area and storing it as a first start memory. , Starting memory means (game control device 100) for extracting a predetermined random number based on the winning of the game ball in the second starting winning area and storing it as a second starting memory, and a predetermined notice effect during the execution of the variable display game ( A performance that performs a prelude) Control means (effect control device 300), and the execution time of the predetermined notice effect is the sum of the number of first start memories and the number of second start memories is a predetermined upper limit number (in this embodiment, 8) It is shorter than the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display game (pending MAX fluctuation) that is started in a state of reaching the state.

  Therefore, since the execution time of the sign effect is shorter than the change time of the pending MAX change (that is, the special figure change display game with the shortest change time), the notice effect (prediction effect) is executed in any change display game. Can do.

  In the present embodiment, the fluctuation pattern of the first special figure fluctuation display game and the fluctuation pattern of the second special figure fluctuation display game both take into account the sum of the number of holds (starting memory number) of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the variation pattern of the first special figure variation display game is selected in consideration of the number of holdings of the special figure 1 (the number of the first start memory), and the variation pattern of the second special figure variation display game is the special pattern. It is also possible to make a selection in consideration of the number of holdings (the number of second start-up memories) in FIG. In this case, in the first special figure fluctuation display game that has the shortest fluctuation time among the first special figure fluctuation display games that can be won in the prelude effect lottery, the number of reserved figures in the special figure 1 is the upper limit number (for example, 4). The first special figure fluctuation display game (pending MAX fluctuation) that is started at the time, and the second special figure fluctuation display game with the shortest fluctuation time among the second special figure fluctuation display games that can be won in the lottery of the prelude effect Is a second special figure fluctuation display game (pending MAX fluctuation) which is started when the number of reserved figures in the special figure 2 is the upper limit number (for example, 4).

That is, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the execution time of the predetermined notice effect (prediction effect) is such that the number of first start memories or the number of second start memories reaches a predetermined upper limit number (eg, 4) It can be configured to be shorter than the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display game (special-figure fluctuation display game) started in the state of being.
With this configuration, the execution time of the warning effect is shorter than the fluctuation time of the pending MAX fluctuation (that is, the special figure fluctuation display game with the shortest fluctuation time). (A sign production) can be executed.

  In this embodiment, the special figure variation display game is executed in the order of winning in the start winning area. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, one special figure fluctuation display game (for example, the second special figure fluctuation display) (Game) may be executed preferentially.

<Modified example of a prelude production>
The sign effect shown in FIGS. 37 to 43 is a type in which a character image that appears in the display area of the display device 41 (or a movable accessory that appears in a position overlapping the display area before and after) always moves to the action position. This is a sign production (hereinafter referred to as “first type sign production”). In addition to (or in place of) the first type of precursor effect, a type of precursor effect that may or may not appear when an appearing character image (or an appearing movable accessory, etc.) moves to the action position. It is also possible to perform the following (hereinafter referred to as “second type precursor effect”).

  In the second type of sign effect, when the sign effect lottery is won, an action availability lottery is performed. The action availability lottery is a lottery for determining whether or not to move the character image to the action position. If the action availability lottery is won, the character is displayed during the execution of the selected special figure variation display game. The image moves to the working position. That is, when the action availability lottery is won, a character image appears and moves to the action position. On the other hand, if the selection is made in the action availability lottery, the character image appears but does not move to the action position.

Further, in the second type of sign effect, after performing the action availability lottery, the on-hold pending change effect lottery is performed. The on-hold pending change effect lottery executes an on-hold pending change effect (an effect that suggests a result of a special figure variation display game being executed or a variation pattern by changing the display mode of the decoration special figure start memory display). If it is a lottery for determining whether or not a lottery for the on-hold change effect is won, the decoration displayed on the on-hold hold display unit 41c during the execution of the winning special figure change display game The display mode of the special figure start memory display (specific hold display in this modification) changes to the suggestion mode. That is, when the lottery for the on-hold hold change effect is won, the display mode of the specific hold display changes to the suggestion mode. On the other hand, when a lottery for the on-hold hold change effect is lost, the display mode of the specific hold display does not change to the suggestion mode.
For example, the lottery of the action availability lottery and the pending change effect during execution is performed in the notice lottery (step C386 or step C389) of the variable effect setting process (FIG. 34).

An example of the action availability lottery table is shown in FIGS.
In the action availability lottery table, the probability that the action is selected (that is, the winning probability) and the case where there is no action are selected in the case where the result of the special figure fluctuation display game executed this time is a big hit and the result is out of place. The probability of being played (i.e., the loss probability) is defined.
For example, in the case where the action availability lottery table shown in FIG. 44 (a) is set, if the result of the special figure fluctuation display game executed this time is a big hit, the winning is performed with a probability of 50% and the special execution executed this time. If the result of the figure variation display game is out of place, the winning is made with a probability of 60%.
The effect control device 300 selects one action availability lottery table from among a plurality of action availability lottery tables (three types of action availability lottery tables shown in FIGS. 44A to 44C) based on the gaming state, for example. And set.

An example of the on-hold pending change effect lottery table is shown in FIGS.
The on-hold pending change effect lottery table wins the action availability lottery and if the result of the special figure fluctuation display game executed this time is a big hit, and the special figure to be won and executed this time. When the result of the variable display game is out of place, when the result is lost in the action availability lottery, and when the result of the special figure variable display game executed this time is a big hit, when the result is lost in the action availability lottery and executed this time The probability that a change with hold is selected (that is, a winning probability) and the probability that a change without hold is selected (that is, a loss probability) when the result of the special figure variation display game is out of place are defined.

For example, in the case where the on-hold pending change effect lottery table shown in FIG. 44D is set, when the action availability lottery is won and the result of the special figure variation display game executed this time is a big hit Win with a probability of 60%, win an action availability lottery, and if the result of the special figure fluctuation display game executed this time is out of place, win with a probability of 70%, lose the action availability lottery, and If the result of the special figure fluctuation display game executed this time is a big hit, the winner is won with a probability of 5%, the action selection lottery is lost, and the result of the special figure fluctuation display game executed this time is out of place. Will not win.
In addition, regardless of which of the four types of pending change change effect lottery tables shown in FIGS. 44 (d) to 44 (g) is set, if a lottery is selected for the action availability lottery, Since the character image G2 does not act on the specific hold display, the display mode of the specific hold display changes to the suggestion mode because the winning is only when the result of the special figure fluctuation display game executed this time is a big hit. By doing so, you can suggest a big hit.
The effect control device 300 is based on, for example, a gaming state, and selects one of a plurality of on-hold pending change effect lottery tables (four types of on-hold pending change effect lottery tables shown in FIGS. 44D to 44G). Select and set the pending change effect lottery table during execution.

In addition, in this modification, although the display type of the decoration special figure start memory display displayed on the on-hold display unit 41c is changed to the suggestion mode as the second type of warning effect, It is not limited to this. The second type of sign effect may be, for example, an effect as to whether or not the display mode of the decorative special figure start memory display displayed on the standby hold display unit 41b changes to the suggestion mode.
Moreover, in this modification, the character image G2 of the teammate character with the stick is displayed as the character image that acts on the specific hold display. However, the character image displayed on the display device 41 is not limited to this and is appropriately changed. For example, it may be a character image G1 of a teammate character having a habit. Further, the way of movement of the character image G2 can be changed as appropriate.
In addition, at a predetermined timing (in the case of this modification, at the start of the sign effect), the display mode of the specific hold display is changed to a display mode imitating an enemy character, and then the character image G2 is displayed on the specific hold display. (In the case of this modification, it is configured to strike with a stick), but is not limited to this. For example, the display mode of the specific hold display may not change to a display mode imitating an enemy character.

FIG. 45 shows an example of the second type precursor effect in the case where the lottery for the prelude effect is won and the action availability lottery is won.
When the precursor effect starts, first, a character image G2 appears in the display area of the display device 41 as shown in [c] of FIG. Next, as shown in [h] in FIG. 45, the character image G2 moves to the action position, and the stick is swung down so that the tip of the stick overlaps the specific hold display. Next, when the special figure fluctuation display game being executed is a special figure fluctuation display game won in the on-hold pending change effect lottery, as shown in FIG. Changes to the suggestion mode, and the precursor effect ends. On the other hand, when the special figure fluctuation display game being executed is a special figure fluctuation display game that has been lost in the lottery of the on-hold pending change effect, as shown in FIG. Does not change to the suggestion mode, and the sign production ends. Then, when the indication effect ends, the character image G2 leaves the action position and disappears from the display area.

  In the example shown in FIG. 45, after the character image G2 acts on the specific hold display (after the bar returns to a state where it does not overlap with the specific hold display), the display mode of the specific hold display changes to the suggestion mode. However, the timing at which the display mode of the specific hold display changes can be changed as appropriate. For example, while the character image G2 is acting on the specific hold display (when the stick overlaps the specific hold display). The display mode of the specific hold display may be changed to the suggestion mode.

FIG. 46 shows an example of the second type of warning effect in the case where the lottery for the signage effect is won and the lottery for action is selected.
When the precursor effect starts, first, a character image G1 appears in the display area of the display device 41 as shown in FIG. Next, as shown in [M] of FIG. 46, the character image G2 disappears from the display area without moving to the action position. Next, when the special figure fluctuation display game being executed is a special figure fluctuation display game won in the lottery of the on-hold hold change effect, as shown in [M] of FIG. 46, the display mode of the specific hold display Changes to the suggestion mode, and the precursor effect ends. On the other hand, when the special figure fluctuation display game being executed is a special figure fluctuation display game that has been lost in the lottery for the on-hold hold change effect, as shown in [Me] of FIG. 46, the display mode of the specific hold display Does not change to the suggestion mode, and the sign production ends.

The length of execution time of the sign effect when winning the action availability lottery and the length of execution time of the sign effect when winning the effect lottery may be the same or different. In the present modification, the length of execution time of the indication effect is, for example, the length from the timing of starting the display of the character image G2 to the timing of starting the display in the suggestion mode of the specific hold display.
Also, if the action selection lottery is lost, after the character image G2 disappears from the display area, the display mode of the specific hold display does not change to the suggestion mode, but before the character image G2 disappears from the display area, the specific hold The display mode of the display may be changed to the suggested mode. In this case, the timing at which the character image G2 disappears from the display area may be the same or different between when the action selection lottery is won and when it is lost.

In addition, during the sign production, in order to make it stand out that the sign production is being executed, the background image is darkened (blacked out), etc. You may make it. The same applies to the first type of sign production.
In addition, as a second type of warning effect, a warning effect on whether or not the display mode of the decoration special figure start memory display displayed on the on-hold display unit 41c is changed to a suggestion mode, and a standby hold display unit 41b. You may comprise so that both the indication effect of whether the display mode of the displayed decoration special figure starting memory display is changed to a suggestion mode can be performed. Furthermore, in this case, the length of execution time of the precursor effect whether or not the display mode of the decoration special figure start memory display displayed on the on-hold hold display unit 41c is changed and the standby hold display unit 41b are displayed. The length of execution time of the precursor effect whether or not the display mode of the decoration special figure start memory display to be changed may be the same or different. The same applies to the first type of sign production.
The timing for starting the display of the character image G2 can be changed as appropriate, and it is preferable to prohibit the display of the character image G2 from being started during the hold shift effect in which the decorative special figure start memory display is shifted to the next. That is, the timing for starting the display of the character image G2 is preferably before the hold shift effect or after the hold shift effect. The same applies to the first type of sign production.

Moreover, you may determine the frequency | count that the display mode of a specific pending | holding display changes during an indication effect based on predetermined conditions. That is, you may perform the change frequency lottery which determines the frequency | count of changing the display mode of a specific hold display. The same applies to the first type of sign production.
In addition, the character image that appears during the sign effect may be selected from a plurality of types of character images based on a predetermined condition. That is, a character lottery for selecting one character image from a plurality of types of character images may be performed. The same applies to the first type of sign production.
Moreover, you may determine the frequency | count that a character image (or movable accessory etc.) acts on a specific hold display during a precursor effect based on predetermined conditions. That is, a lottery of action times for determining the number of times that a character image (or a movable accessory or the like) is applied to the specific hold display may be performed. The same applies to the first type of sign production.

Further, the change number lottery, the character lottery, and the action number lottery can be performed in combination. An example is shown in FIG.
As described above, the effect control device 300 performs the action availability lottery and the on-hold pending change effect lottery in order to determine the effect type of the second type precursor effect. In addition to these lotteries, the number of times that the display mode of the specific hold display changes (or selection of the number of times to change) depends on the type of character image that appears by combining the lottery for change count, the lottery for character, and the lottery for action count. Ratio), the number of times that the character image acts on the specific hold display (or the selection ratio of the number of times of acting), and the like can be varied.

  In addition to the lottery of the action availability lottery and the pending change effect during execution, in the case of performing a combination of the change number lottery, the character lottery and the action number lottery, for example, when the lottery of the pending change change effect is won A lottery for changing the number of times to change the display mode of the hold display is performed, and a character lottery for selecting one character image from a plurality of types of character images is performed based on the result of the lottery for changing the number of times. Based on the result of the above and the result of the character lottery, the number of operations lottery for determining the number of times the character image is applied to the specific hold display (for example, the number of hitting the specific hold display with a stick) is performed. In this case, the number-of-changes lottery, the character lottery, and the number-of-actions lottery are performed, for example, in the notice lottery (step C386 or step C389) of the variable effect setting process (FIG. 34).

An example of the character lottery table is shown in FIG.
In the character lottery table, the probability and the character image B that the character image A is selected when “holding change once” is selected by the change number lottery and “holding change twice” is selected. The probability of being selected is specified.
Here, “hold change once” means changing the display mode of the specific hold display once, that is, from the normal display mode (for example, blue circle) to the first suggestion mode (for example, green circle). The “holding change twice” means changing the display mode of the specific hold display twice, that is, changing from the normal display mode to the first suggestion mode, and then the first The suggestion mode is changed to the second suggestion mode (for example, a red circle).

An example of the action frequency lottery table is shown in FIG.
In the action number lottery table, “character image A” is selected by character lottery and “holding change once” is selected by number of change lottery, and “character image A” is selected by character lottery. In addition, when “pending change twice” is selected by lot change lottery, “character image B” is selected by character lottery, and “pending change once” is selected by change lottery, When “Character Image B” is selected by the character lottery and “Pending change twice” is selected by the number of changes lottery, the probability of selecting “One Action” and “Two Action” are selected. Probabilities are specified.
Here, “single action” is to make the character image act once on the specific hold display (for example, hitting the specific hold display once with a stick), and “twice action” means the character image. To act on the specific hold display twice (for example, hitting the specific hold display twice with a stick).

For example, when “holding change once” is selected by the number-of-changes lottery and “double-action” is selected by the number-of-actions lottery, the first action of causing the character image to act twice on the specific hold display Thus, the display mode of the specific hold display may be changed, or the display mode of the specific hold display may be changed by the second action of the two actions.
In addition, when “pending change twice” is selected by the change number lottery and “one action” is selected by the action number lottery, the first suggestion mode is changed to the second suggestion mode. Or may be changed to the second suggestion mode without changing to the first suggestion mode.

As described above, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a variable display game (special figure variable display game) that displays a plurality of identification information in a variable manner based on the establishment of the start condition is executed, and the result of the variable display game is A starting machine that generates a special gaming state that gives a player a gaming value when a special result is obtained, and that extracts a predetermined random number based on the establishment of the starting condition and stores it as a starting memory of a variable display game Means (game control device 100) and effect control means (effect control device 300) for executing effects related to the variable display game. The effect control means includes a predetermined image (character image G1) and start memory. Can be displayed on the display device 41, and a predetermined image acts on the start memory display as a predetermined notice effect (prediction effect). And prediction effect of over emissions, it is possible to perform a prediction effect of the second pattern in which a predetermined image does not act on the start memory display.
In the case of the present embodiment, the first pattern notice effect is a second type sign effect when winning the action availability lottery, and the second pattern notice effect is the second type when the action result lottery is lost. It is a harbinger.

Therefore, the character image G2 may or may not act on the decoration special figure start memory display, and the movement of the image (character image G2) that can act on the decoration special figure start memory display is not one pattern. The interest of the game can be enhanced by an image that can act on the diagram start memory display.
In the case of the present embodiment, two patterns are provided: a pattern in which the character image G2 moves to the action position and acts on the decoration special figure start memory display, and a pattern in which the character image G2 does not move to the action position. For example, in addition to these patterns, there may be provided a pattern in which the character image G2 moves to the action position but does not act on the decoration special figure start memory display (does not swing the stick down).

  Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the effect control means (effect control device 300) can change the display mode of the start memory display (decoration special figure start memory display) in a predetermined notice effect (prediction effect). It is possible to configure such that the rate at which the display mode of the start memory display changes in the notice effect of the first pattern is higher than the rate at which the display mode of the start memory display changes in the notice effect of the second pattern ( (Refer to Drawing 44 (d)-(g)).

  By configuring in this way, the sign presentation is likely to change the display mode of the decoration special figure start memory display depending on the pattern of the sign special effect (that is, by the movement of the image that can act on the decoration special figure start memory display). It can be suggested whether it is a production. Therefore, the player can play the game with expectation at the stage where the player can recognize that the display mode of the decoration special drawing start memory display is easy to change based on the suggestion. Will improve. Further, not only the final stage of whether or not the display mode of the decoration special figure start memory display changes, but also how the image (character image G2) that can act on the decoration special figure start memory display moves. Since the player's interest can be attracted to the stage as well, it is possible to execute a highly interesting precursor effect.

<On-hold change production>
As described above, the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment changes the display mode of the decorative special figure start memory display displayed on the standby hold display unit 41b as the hold change effect, and indicates the standby hold change that suggests the prefetching result. An on-hold pending change effect that suggests a result or a variation pattern of a running special figure variation display game by changing the display mode of the special figure start memory display displayed on the on-hold hold display unit 41c. It is feasible.
For example, when the movable combination 44a overlaps with the holding display portions 41b and 41c in the front-rear direction (that is, when the movable combination 44a is positioned in front of the holding display portions 41b and 41c), the holding change effect is provided. When it is executed, there is a possibility that the state in which the display mode of the decorative special figure start memory display is changed by the movable accessory 44a becomes invisible (difficult to see). However, in this embodiment, regardless of whether or not the movable accessory 44a overlaps with the holding display portions 41b and 41c in the front-rear direction, that is, the state in which the display mode of the decorative special figure start memory display is changing is visually recognized. Regardless of whether it is impossible (difficult to visually recognize) or not, when the execution timing of the on-hold change effect arrives, the on-hold change effect is started and the display mode of the decoration special figure start memory display to be changed is changed. I will do it.

Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 48 (a), the effect control device 300 displays the decorative special figure start memory display to be changed (in this case, the right special decoration start memory display). ), A holding change effect (here, standby holding change effect) is executed to change the display mode of the decoration special figure start memory display to be changed.
Of course, during the period in which the movable accessory 44a overlaps with the holding display portions 41b and 41c, it is possible to prohibit the execution of the holding change effect. However, when configured in this way, due to a malfunction of the movable combination 44a, the movable combination 44a is moved back and forth with the hold display sections 41b and 41c during a period in which the movable combination 44a overlaps with the hold display sections 41b and 41c. When the inconvenience that the state does not overlap occurs, the player cannot enjoy the accessory action effect and cannot enjoy the hold change effect.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, execution of the hold change effect is performed regardless of whether or not the movable combination 44a overlaps with the holding display portions 41b and 41c before and after, that is, regardless of the state of the movable combination 44a. When the timing has arrived, it is configured to start the hold change effect and change the display mode of the decoration special figure start memory display to be changed. As a result, even if a malfunction of the movable accessory 44a occurs and it becomes impossible to enjoy the accessory operation effect, the reserved change effect can be enjoyed, so that the interest of the game can be prevented from being lowered.

Here, if the decorative special figure start memory display is hidden by the movable accessory 44a and becomes invisible (difficult to see), there is a possibility that the accurate start memory number cannot be grasped even if the display on the hold display portions 41b and 41c is viewed. In this embodiment, since the number hold display unit 41e is provided separately from the hold display units 41b and 41c, the accurate start memory number is grasped even if the decorative special figure start memory display is invisible (difficult to see). it can.
Further, in the case of the present embodiment, since the holding change effect is executed regardless of the state of the movable accessory 44a, the movable accessory 44a overlaps with the holding display portions 41b and 41c before and after the holding change effect. It may change to a state where it does not overlap, or the movable accessory 44a may change from a state where it does not overlap the holding display parts 41b, 41c to a state where it overlaps.

In addition, it is also possible to execute the hold change effect in an area wider than the size of the movable accessory 44a (the size when the movable accessory 44a is viewed from the front) in the display area of the display device 41. Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 48B, an image (effect image E or the like) of a size that protrudes from the movable accessory 44a when viewed from the front as an effect image that enhances the effect of the hold change effect. You may display.
As a result, the movable accessory 44a overlaps with the holding display portions 41b and 41c in the front and rear directions, and displays related to the holding change effect (display of the decoration special figure start memory display to be changed and the decoration special figure start memory display). Since at least a part of an image (such as the effect image E) related to the change of the aspect is not hidden by the movable accessory, the player can recognize that the hold change effect is being executed.
In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 48, only a part of the decoration special figure start memory display to be changed is hidden by the movable accessory 44a and cannot be visually recognized (difficult to see), but the decoration special figure start to be changed is started. The entire memory display may be hidden by the movable accessory 44a so as to be invisible (difficult to see).

In addition, a character image (predetermined character image related to the hold change effect) is displayed as an effect image that enhances the effect of the hold change effect, and the character image is displayed as a decorative special figure regardless of the state of the movable accessory 44a. An effect acting on the memory display may be performed.
In addition, the operation time of the movable accessory 44a may be longer or shorter than the execution time of the hold change effect. In addition, the operation time of the movable accessory 44a may be the same as the execution time of the hold change effect.

Further, instead of the movable accessory 44a, a character image that can be superimposed and displayed on the hold display portions 41b and 41c may be displayed. In this case, the character image may be displayed on the near side of the decorative special figure start memory display, or may be displayed on the back side of the decorative special figure start memory display.
When the character image is displayed on the near side of the decoration special figure start memory display, when the character image and the decoration special figure start memory display overlap with each other, the character image is the character of the decoration special figure start memory display. The part that overlaps the image will be hidden. On the other hand, when the character image is displayed on the back side of the decoration special figure start storage display, when the character image and the decoration special figure start storage display overlap, The part which overlaps with the decoration special figure start memory display will be hidden.

  In addition, the movable combination 44a is made of a transparent or translucent member, and the display of the decoration special drawing start memory display is changed through the movable combination 44a or a display related to the hold change effect. You may comprise so that can be visually recognized. Alternatively, a hole or a gap is provided in the movable accessory 44a so that the display state of the decoration special figure start memory display or the display related to the hold change effect can be visually recognized from the hole or the gap. Also good.

In addition, the movable accessory that can be overlapped with the holding display portions 41b and 41c in the front-rear direction can be divided into a plurality of parts as shown in FIG. 49, for example, and no gap is formed between the parts. The movable accessory 44b that can be converted from the state (the state where it is not cracked) to the second state (the state where the crack is completed) in which a gap having a predetermined width is formed between the parts may be used.
In this case, as shown in FIG. 50, it is preferable that the execution period of the hold change effect overlaps at least a part of the period (t22 to t24) in which the movable accessory 44b is in the crack-completed state. As a result, for example, as shown in FIG. 49, a decorative feature is formed from a gap formed in the movable accessory 44b (that is, a gap formed during a period (t21 to t25) in which the movable accessory 44b is not broken). The state in which the display mode of the figure start memory display is changing and the display related to the hold change effect can be visually recognized. Here, the display mode of the decorative special figure start memory display is switched from the display mode before the change to the display mode after the change by the hold change effect. In the present application, the hold change effect is the display in the display mode after the change. It ends at the timing of starting. Accordingly, the hold change effect includes the time when the display mode changes (a period from immediately before the change to immediately after the change (including immediately before and immediately after the change)), but not after the change of the display mode. In addition, before changing the display mode of the decoration special figure start memory display, when the effect that suggests that the display mode will change soon is performed by blinking the decoration special figure start memory display or the like, the effect is also suspended. It may be included in change production.

In the example shown in FIG. 50, the start timing of the hold change effect is set to coincide with the timing (t21) at which the movable accessory 44b starts the conversion operation to the crack completion state. The start timing can be changed as appropriate, and is preferably set within a period (t21 to t25) in which the movable accessory 44b is not broken.
Further, in the example shown in FIG. 50, the end timing of the hold change effect is set within the period (t22 to t24) in which the movable accessory 44b is in a state of completion of cracking. It can be changed and is preferably set within a period (t21 to t25) in which the movable accessory 44b is not broken.

In addition, when the movable combination that can be overlapped with the holding display portions 41b and 41c is a movable combination 44b that can be converted into an unbroken state and a crack completion state, the movable combination 44b is opened and closed ( The position for performing the conversion operation to the crack completion state and the return operation to return to the non-breaking state may be determined based on the position of the decoration special figure start memory display to be changed.
In the example shown in FIG. 49, among the three decorative special figure start memory displays displayed on the standby hold display section 41b, the right special ornament special figure start storage display is more visible when the movable accessory 44b is in a state where the crack is completed. In the middle, the decorative special figure start memory display is easier to visually recognize when the movable accessory 44b is not broken.
Therefore, for example, by setting the position at which the movable accessory 44b performs the opening / closing operation to a position that overlaps the front and rear of the decoration special figure start memory display to be changed, the decorative special figure starts from the gap formed in the movable accessory 44b. It is possible to visually recognize how the display mode of the memory display is changing.

  As described above, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a variable display game (special figure variable display game) that displays a plurality of identification information in a variable manner based on the establishment of the start condition is executed, and the result of the variable display game is A starting machine that generates a special gaming state that gives a player a gaming value when a special result is obtained, and that extracts a predetermined random number based on the establishment of the starting condition and stores it as a starting memory of a variable display game Start memory display area (standby hold display section 41b, pending hold display) provided with means (game control device 100) and a start memory display (decorative special figure start memory display) corresponding to the start memory in the display area of the display device 41 Part 41c), the start memory display control means (production control device 300), the state positioned in front of the start memory display area (the state overlapping before and after), and the front storage display area is retracted from the front And a movable combination 44a that can be converted into a state (a state that does not overlap before and after), and the start memory display control means changes the display mode of the start memory display regardless of the state of the movable combination 44a. A memory display change effect (holding change effect) can be executed.

  Therefore, even if the operation failure of the movable accessory occurs and it becomes impossible to enjoy the accessory action effect, the reserved change effect can be enjoyed, so that the interest of the game can be enhanced by the reserved change effect.

  Further, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a variable display game (special map variable display game) that displays a plurality of identification information in a variable manner based on the establishment of the start condition is executed, and the result of the variable display game is a special result. A starting storage means for generating a special gaming state that gives a player a gaming value in the event that a predetermined random number is extracted based on the establishment of the starting condition and stored as a starting storage of a variable display game ( Game control device 100), a state (front and back overlapping state) located in front of the start memory display region (standby hold display unit 41b, running hold display unit 41c) provided in the display region of the display device 41, and the start A movable accessory 44a that can be converted into a state retracted from the front of the storage display area (a state that does not overlap before and after), and display control means (production control device 3) that controls display contents displayed in the display area 0), and the display control means displays a start memory display (decorative special figure start memory display) corresponding to the start memory in the start memory display area, and displays the start memory display in a predetermined area within the display area. A start memory display change effect (holding change effect) for changing the display mode and displaying an image (effect image E or the like) related to the change can be executed, and at least a part of the predetermined area is provided by the movable accessory 44a. Even in a state of being positioned in front of the start memory display area, it can be configured to be visible from the front (see FIG. 48B).

Therefore, even when the movable combination 44a is positioned in front of the hold display portions 41b and 41c, at least a part of the display related to the hold change effect is not hidden by the moveable effect. It can enhance interest.
The predetermined area does not have to be larger than the size of the movable accessory 44a (the size when the movable accessory 44a is viewed from the front), and the movable accessory 44a is in front of the holding display portions 41b and 41c. If at least a part of the predetermined area is visible in the positioned state, the size of the predetermined area can be appropriately changed.

  Further, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a variable display game (special map variable display game) that displays a plurality of identification information in a variable manner based on the establishment of the start condition is executed, and the result of the variable display game is a special result. A starting storage means for generating a special gaming state that gives a player a gaming value in the event that a predetermined random number is extracted based on the establishment of the starting condition and stored as a starting storage of a variable display game ( (Game control device 100) and a start memory display area (standby hold display part 41b, in-progress hold display part 41c) provided in the display area of the display device 41 with a start memory display corresponding to the start memory (decorative special figure start memory display) ) Start memory display control means (effect control device 300), a state positioned in front of the start memory display area (overlapping front and back), and a state retracted from the front of the start memory display area And a movable combination 44b that can be converted into a first state (where the movable combination 44b can be divided into a plurality of parts and no gap is formed between the parts). It is possible to convert from a state that is not cracked) to a second state in which a gap of a predetermined width is formed between the parts (the crack completion state), and the start memory display control means changes the display mode of the start memory display The start memory display change effect (hold change effect) to be executed can be executed, and the start memory display change effect execution period (t21 to t23) is at least the period (t22 to t24) in which the movable accessory 44b is in the first state. It can be configured to overlap with a part (see FIG. 50).

  Therefore, even when the movable accessory 44b is positioned in front of the holding display portions 41b and 41c, the display mode of the decorative special figure start memory display changes from the gap (gap) formed in the movable accessory 44b. Since it is possible to visually recognize the state of being displayed and the display related to the on-hold change effect, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game by the on-hold change effect.

<Suggesting effect, switching effect, hold effect>
The gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment can execute a switching effect for switching the display mode of the decoration special figure start memory display displayed on the display device 41 to the suggestion mode. As described above, by displaying the decorative special figure start memory display displayed on the standby hold display unit 41b in a suggestive manner, the result of the special drawing change display game based on the corresponding start memory and the prefetch result such as the fluctuation pattern Can be suggested. Further, by displaying the decoration special figure start memory display displayed on the on-hold display unit 41c in a suggestion manner, it is possible to suggest the result of the special figure fluctuation display game being executed, the fluctuation pattern, and the like.
Here, “switching the display mode of the decoration special figure start memory display to the suggestion mode” includes switching from the normal display mode to the suggestion mode, or from the predetermined suggestion mode (for example, the first suggestion mode) to the predetermined mode. It also includes switching to a suggestion mode (for example, the second suggestion mode) different from the suggestion mode.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment can execute a suggestion effect that suggests execution of the switching effect before the start of the switching effect.
In addition, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment displays the decoration special figure start memory display in the suggestion mode after the switching effect ends (continues to display), suggests a prefetching result, or changes the special figure being executed. A holding effect that suggests the result of the display game or the variation pattern is executed.

  As described above, the display mode of the decoration special figure start memory display is switched from the display mode before the change to the display mode after the change by the hold change effect. In the present application, the hold change effect is the display mode after the change. It ends at the timing of starting the display of. Therefore, the hold change effect includes the time when the display mode is changed (including the period from immediately before the change to immediately after the change (including immediately before and after the change). (After the end of the switching effect) is not included. In addition, when an effect (suggested effect) suggesting that the display mode is about to change is performed before the display mode of the decoration special figure start memory display is changed (that is, before the start of the switching effect), the effect is also changed on hold. It may be included in the production.

That is, in this embodiment, the switching effect (when the display mode is changed) and the suggesting effect (before the display mode is changed) are included in the hold change effect, but the hold effect (after the display mode is changed) is the hold change effect. Not included.
In addition, the suggestion effect may be executed or not executed before the start of the switching effect, and the hold effect is always executed after the end of the switching effect. In addition, after the suggestion effect ends, the switching effect may be executed or not executed.

FIG. 51 (a) shows an example of the flow up to the execution of the hold effect.
As shown in FIG. 51 (a), when a new start memory is generated, the production control device 300 starts displaying the decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the start memory (target start memory). In the example shown in FIG. 51A, the decorative special figure start memory display (start memory display) corresponding to the target start memory is displayed in a normal display mode.
In this embodiment, the sound effect associated with the display start of the decoration special figure start memory display is not output, but the sound effect associated with the display start is output at the start of display of the decoration special figure start memory display. You may do it.
There are a display mode of the decorative special figure start memory display, a still image mode in which the decorative special figure start memory display is displayed statically, and a moving image mode in which the decorative special figure start memory display is animated. In the present embodiment, the normal display mode is a still image mode, and the suggestion mode includes a still image mode and a moving image mode. Hereinafter, the still image mode among the suggested modes is referred to as “still image suggesting mode”, and the moving image mode among the suggested modes is referred to as “moving image suggesting mode”.

In addition, when a new start memory is generated, the effect control device 300 performs a lottery process for a hold change effect (a lottery process for determining whether to execute a hold change effect) for the start memory (target start memory). )I do. In the lottery process for the pending change effect, it is determined whether or not to execute the switching effect and whether or not to execute the suggestion effect. In addition, when execution of the switching effect is determined, the content of the switching effect (the number and timing of executing the switching effect, the display mode after the switching, etc.) is also determined by the lottery process of the hold change effect. In addition, when execution of the suggestion effect is determined, the effect content of the suggestion effect is also determined by the lottery process for the hold change effect. Here, in the suggestion effect, a pending change type suggestion effect that suggests the execution of the switching effect according to the display mode of the decoration special diagram start memory display corresponding to the target start memory, and a decoration special diagram corresponding to the target start memory There is a suggestion image type suggestion effect that suggests the execution of the switching effect by displaying the suggestion image acting on the start-up memory display.
As described above, in the lottery process for the pending change effect, a plurality of items are determined. However, all items may be determined by one lottery, or a plurality of lotteries (for example, a lottery for whether or not to perform a switching effect, Each item may be sequentially determined by performing a lottery of the content of the switching effect, a lottery of execution of the suggestion effect, and a lottery of the content of the suggestion effect).

Then, when the execution of the suggestion effect is determined in the lottery process for the hold change effect, and the determined effect content of the suggestion effect is the hold change type, the effect control device 300 displays the hold change type at a predetermined timing. Perform suggestive effects. Thereby, the execution of the switching effect is suggested depending on the display mode of the decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the target start memory (for example, by blinking the decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the target start memory). .
In addition, when execution of the suggestion effect is determined in the lottery process of the pending change effect, and the determined effect content of the suggestion effect is the suggestion image type, the effect control device 300 displays the suggestion image type at a predetermined timing. Perform suggestive effects. As a result, for example, as shown in FIG. 51 (b), the suggestion image (an image imitating a sword in the example shown in FIG. 51 (b)) that acts on the decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the target start memory. The display suggests execution of the switching effect. In FIG. 51 (b), a suggestion image acting on the decorative special figure start memory display displayed on the standby hold display unit 41b is displayed. However, in the suggestion effect of the suggestion image type, the on-hold hold display unit is displayed. It is also possible to display a suggestion image acting on the decorative special figure start memory display displayed on 41c.
On the other hand, when the non-execution of the suggestion effect is determined in the lottery process for the pending change effect, the effect control device 300 does not execute any type of the suggestion effect.

In the present embodiment, the suggestion effect of the pending change type is an effect without a sound effect. Accordingly, while the reserved change type suggestion effect is being executed, sound effects for other effects (effects other than the hold change type suggestion effect) are output from the speakers 19a and 19b. Since no sound effect is output, it is possible to give a moderate expectation to the player, and it becomes easier to hear sound effects for other effects than when a sound effect for a suggestion effect of the on-hold change type is output.
In the present embodiment, the suggestion effect of the suggestion image type is an effect with a sound effect. Therefore, during execution of the suggestion effect of the suggestion image type, sound effects for other effects (effects other than the suggestion effect of the suggestion image type) are output from the speakers 19a and 19b, and the suggestion image type of the suggestion image type is output at a predetermined timing. Since the sound effect for the suggestion effect is also output from the speakers 19a and 19b, the execution of the suggestion effect can be appealed.

  Since the suggestion effect of the hold change type is often less expected by the player than the suggestion effect of the suggestion image type, even if the execution of the suggestion effect of the hold change type is appealed, the player's expectation may not increase High nature. In addition, since the suggestion effect of the pending change type often has a longer execution time than the suggestion effect of the suggestion image type, even if the sound effect for the suggestion effect of the suggestion image type is output, Although it does not affect the listening so much, if the sound effect for the suggestion effect of the hold change type is output, there is a high possibility that the effect sound for other effects becomes difficult to hear. Therefore, in this embodiment, the sound effect for the suggestion effect of the hold change type is not output.

In addition, when execution of the switching effect is determined in the lottery process for the pending change effect, the effect control device 300 executes the switching effect at a predetermined timing. Thereby, the display mode of the decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the target start memory is switched to the display mode (display mode after switching) determined in the lottery process of the hold change effect.
Next, the effect control device 300 executes the hold effect following the switching effect. In the hold effect, the decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the target start memory is displayed in a still image suggestion mode (continuously displayed) to suggest a prefetching result, or for a special figure variation display game being executed. The still picture type hold effect that suggests the result or variation pattern, etc. and the decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the target start memory are displayed in the video suggestion mode (continue to display), suggesting the look-ahead result Or a video-type hold effect that suggests the result or variation pattern of a special-figure variation display game that is being executed. When the display mode after switching determined in the lottery process of the hold change effect is a still image suggestion mode, the hold effect of the still image type is executed, and the display after switching determined in the lottery process of the hold change effect If the mode is a video suggestion mode, a video type hold effect is executed.

  On the other hand, when the non-execution of the switching effect is determined in the lottery process of the hold change effect, the hold effect related to the target start memory is not being executed (that is, the decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the target start memory) When the current display mode is a normal display mode), the effect control device 300 does not execute the switching effect or the hold effect. In addition, when the non-execution of the switching effect is determined in the lottery process of the hold change effect, the hold effect relating to the target start memory is being executed (that is, the decorative special figure start memory corresponding to the target start memory). If the current display mode of the display is a suggestion mode), the effect control device 300 does not execute the switching effect and continues the hold effect.

In the present embodiment, the switching effect is an effect with a sound effect. Accordingly, during execution of the switching effect, sound effects for other effects (effects other than the switching effect) are output from the speakers 19a and 19b, and the sound effects for the switching effect are also output from the speakers 19a and 19b at a predetermined timing. Since it is output, execution of the switching effect can be appealed.
In the present embodiment, the hold effect is an effect without a sound effect. Accordingly, during execution of the still image type hold effect or the moving image type hold effect, sound effects for other effects (effects other than the hold effect) are output from the speakers 19a and 19b. Since no sound effect is output, it is possible to give the player a reasonable expectation, and it is easier to hear the sound effect for other effects than when the effect sound for the hold effect is output.

  The hold effect is an effect that is executed subsequent to the switching effect, and is always executed when the switching effect is executed. The need to appeal is low. In addition, because the holding effect often has a longer execution time than the switching effect, the output of the sound effect for the switching effect does not significantly affect the listening of the sound effect for other effects, but the effect for the holding effect If the sound is output, there is a high possibility that inconveniences such as difficulty in hearing other effect sound effects will occur. For this reason, in this embodiment, the sound effect for holding effect is not output.

For example, as shown in FIG. 51 (a), when a power failure occurs during the display of the decorative special figure start memory display, the display is interrupted. Thereafter, when the power is restored from the power failure, the effect control device 300 resumes the display. Since the information related to the display mode of the decorative special figure start memory display stored in the effect control device 300 is deleted due to the power failure, the decorative special figure start memory display is displayed in a display mode other than the normal display mode before the occurrence of the power failure. Even if it has been done, it will be displayed in the normal display mode (default display mode) after a power failure recovery.
In the present embodiment, the sound effect is not output when the decoration special figure start memory display is resumed (that is, when the display is resumed due to power failure recovery). Thereby, it is possible to prevent a variety of sound effects from being mixed at the time of restoration of a power outage, thereby reducing the interest of the game.
Here, the “effect without sound effect” in the present application may be an effect in which the sound data for outputting the sound effect for the effect itself is not stored in the audio ROM 327 or the like, or the effect for the effect. Although the sound data for outputting the sound is stored in the sound ROM 327 or the like, the sound based on the sound data may not be output from the speakers 19a and 19b.

  In the example shown in FIG. 51A, the decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the target start memory is initially displayed in the normal display mode, but can be displayed in the suggestion mode from the beginning. It is. In this case, the switching effect is not executed, and the hold effect is started as soon as the display of the decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the target start memory is started. When the switching effect is executed, the execution of the holding effect can be appealed by the sound effect for the switching effect, but when the holding effect is executed without executing the switching effect, the sound effect for the switching effect is displayed. Since it is not output, the execution of the hold effect cannot be appealed by the sound effect for the switching effect. Therefore, when the holding effect is executed without executing the switching effect, a sound effect can be output at the start of the holding effect.

  In addition, the suggestion effect of the pending change type suggests the execution of the switching effect by the display mode of the decoration special figure start memory display (display mode for the suggestion effect of the pending change type), but the indication for the suggestion effect of the pending change type As an aspect, there may be a plurality of types of display forms having different expectation levels (expectation level for jackpot, expectation level for reach occurrence, etc.). Furthermore, in this case, the presence or absence of a sound effect may be determined depending on the type of display mode. Specifically, for example, the display mode for the suggestion effect of the pending change type is divided into two groups, group A (for example, a high expectation group) and group B (for example, a low expectation group), and a decorative special drawing The suggestion effect of the hold change type that displays the start memory display in the display mode belonging to the group A and suggests the execution of the switching effect is set as the effect with the sound effect, and the decorative special figure start memory display is the display mode belonging to the group B. The suggestion effect of the pending change type that is displayed and suggests execution of the switching effect may be an effect without a sound effect. In this case, the level of expectation can be grasped by the display mode of the decoration special figure start memory display (display mode for the suggestion effect of the hold change type), or can be grasped by the presence or absence of a sound effect.

  If the expectation of the special figure variation display game based on the start memory of the target is high, the effect with the sound effect is executed as the suggestion effect of the hold change type, and the target start memory is shared. When the expected level of the special figure fluctuation display game based on the game is low, an effect without a sound effect may be executed as a suggestion effect of the on-hold change type. In this case, the level of expectation cannot be grasped in the display mode of the decoration special figure start memory display (display mode for the suggestion effect of the hold change type), but can be grasped by the presence or absence of the sound effect.

  The suggestion effect of the suggestion image type suggests the execution of the switch effect by the display of the suggestion image acting on the decoration special figure start memory display, but even if there are a plurality of kinds of suggestion images having different expectations as the suggestion image good. Furthermore, in this case, the presence or absence of a sound effect may be determined depending on the type of suggestion image. Specifically, for example, the suggestion image is divided into two groups, group C (for example, high expectation group) and group D (for example, low expectation group), and the suggestion image belonging to group C is displayed and switched. The suggestion effect of the suggestion image type that suggests the execution of the effect is set as the effect with the sound effect, the suggestion image type that suggests the execution of the switching effect by displaying the suggestion image belonging to the group D, without the sound effect It is good as a production. In this case, the level of expectation can be grasped even with the suggestion image, and can be grasped even with the presence or absence of a sound effect.

  In addition, if the expectation image of the special figure variation display game based on the start memory of the target is high and the suggestion image is common, an effect with a sound effect is executed as the suggestion effect of the suggestion image type, and the start memory of the target is stored. When the expected level of the special figure fluctuation display game based on the game is low, an effect without sound effects may be executed as the suggestion effect of the suggestion image type. In this case, the level of expectation cannot be grasped by the suggestion image, but can be grasped by the presence or absence of a sound effect.

In addition, the suggestion mode may include a plurality of types of suggestion modes having different degrees of expectation. Further, in this case, the presence or absence of a sound effect may be determined depending on the type of suggestion mode.
Specifically, for example, the suggestion mode is divided into two groups, group E (for example, high expectation group) and group F (for example, low expectation group), and the display mode of the decoration special figure start memory display is grouped. The switching effect for switching to the suggestion mode belonging to E may be an effect with a sound effect, and the switching effect for switching the display mode of the decoration special figure start memory display to the suggestion mode belonging to the group F may be an effect without a sound effect. In this case, the level of expectation can be grasped even in the display mode (suggesting mode) after switching, and can also be grasped based on the presence or absence of sound effects.
In addition, for example, a holding effect that displays the decoration special figure start memory display in a suggestion mode belonging to the group E is used as an effect with a sound effect, and a holding effect that displays the decoration special figure start memory display in a suggestion mode belonging to the group F is provided. It is also possible to produce an effect without sound effects. In this case, the level of expectation can be grasped by the display mode (suggestion mode) of the decoration special figure start memory display, and can be grasped also by the presence or absence of a sound effect.

In addition, when the display mode (suggestion mode) after switching is common and the expectation level of the special figure variation display game based on the start memory of the target is high, an effect with a sound effect is executed as a switching effect, When the expectation level of the special figure variation display game based on the start memory is low, an effect without a sound effect may be executed as a switching effect. In this case, the level of expectation cannot be grasped in the display mode (suggesting mode) after switching, but can be grasped based on the presence or absence of sound effects.
In addition, the display mode (suggestion mode) of the decoration special figure start memory display is made common, and when the expectation of the special figure variation display game based on the target start memory is high, an effect with sound effects is executed as a hold effect However, when the expectation level of the special figure variation display game based on the target start-up memory is low, an effect without a sound effect may be executed as a holding effect. In this case, the level of expectation cannot be grasped by the display mode (suggestion mode) of the decorative special figure start memory display, but can be grasped by the presence or absence of sound effects.

  As described above, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a variable display game (special figure variable display game) that displays a plurality of identification information in a variable manner based on the establishment of the start condition is executed, and the result of the variable display game is A game machine that generates a special game state that gives a game value to a player when a special result is obtained, and extracts a predetermined random number based on the establishment of the start condition and stores it as a start memory of a variable display game A storage means (game control device 100), a start memory display control means (effect control device 300) for displaying a start memory display (decoration special figure start memory display) corresponding to the start memory on the display device 41, and a variable display game And an effect control means (effect control device 300) for executing the related effects. The display mode of the start memory display includes a still image mode and a moving image mode. The switching effect of switching the display mode from the still image mode to the video mode, the suggesting effect that suggests the execution of the switching effect, and the hold effect that displays the start memory display in the moving image mode can be executed, The effect is accompanied by the output of the sound effect (the effect with the sound effect), and the hold effect is the effect without the output of the sound effect (the effect without the sound effect).

Therefore, since it is possible to avoid inconveniences such as difficulty in hearing the sound effect that the player wants to hear preferentially because various sound effects are mixed, the effect of the game can be enhanced by the sound effect.
Here, the “effect without sound effect output” may be an effect in which the sound data itself for outputting the sound effect for the effect is not stored in the audio ROM 327 or the like. Although the sound data for outputting the sound effect is stored in the sound ROM 327 or the like, the sound based on the sound data may not be output.

In addition, the decoration special figure start memory display can be switched from the still image mode to the moving image mode by the switching effect, can be switched from the moving image mode to the still image mode, and the first still image It is also possible to switch from a mode to a second still image mode that is different from the first still image mode, and it is also possible to switch from a first video mode to a second video mode that is different from the first video mode. is there.
That is, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the display mode of the start memory display (decoration special figure start memory display) includes a first moving image mode and a second moving image mode, and an effect control means (effect control device) 300) is a switch effect that switches the display mode of the start memory display from the first video mode to the second video mode, a suggestive effect that suggests execution of the switch effect, and a hold effect that displays the start memory display in the second video mode. And can be configured to be executable.
Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the display mode of the start memory display (decoration special figure start memory display) includes a moving image mode and a still image mode, and the effect control means (effect control device 300) is , A switching effect for switching the display mode of the start memory display from the moving image mode to the still image mode, a suggestion effect that suggests execution of the switching effect, and a hold effect that displays the start memory display in the still image mode can be executed. It can be configured as follows.
Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the display mode of the start memory display (decoration special figure start memory display) includes a first still image mode and a second still image mode, and an effect control means (effect The control device 300) displays the switching effect of switching the display mode of the start memory display from the first still image mode to the second still image mode, the suggesting effect suggesting the execution of the switching effect, and the start memory display of the second still image mode. It is possible to configure so as to be able to execute the hold effect displayed at
By configuring in this way, the interest of the game can be enhanced.

Moreover, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the switching effect can be configured to be an effect accompanied by the output of a sound effect.
By configuring in this way, it is possible to notify that the display mode of the start memory display is switched, so that the interest of the game can be enhanced by the sound effect.
In this embodiment, the switching effect is an effect with a sound effect, but the switching effect can also be an effect without a sound effect.

  Further, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a variable display game (special map variable display game) that displays a plurality of identification information in a variable manner based on the establishment of the start condition is executed, and the result of the variable display game is a special result. A starting storage means for generating a special gaming state that gives a player a gaming value when it becomes a game, extracting a predetermined random number based on establishment of a starting condition, and storing it as a starting storage of a variable display game (Game control device 100), start memory display control means (effect control device 300) for displaying a start memory display (decoration special figure start memory display) corresponding to the start memory on the display device 41, and a variable display game And an effect control means (effect control device 300) for executing an effect. The display mode of the start memory display includes a still image mode and a moving image mode. When the mode is switched from the still image mode to the video mode, a sound effect is output from the sound source device (speakers 19a, 19b), a power failure occurs in the state where the start memory display is displayed, When the display of the start memory display is resumed, no sound effect is output from the sound source device.

Therefore, since it is possible to avoid inconveniences such as various sound effects being mixed and making it difficult to hear the sound effects that the player wants to hear preferentially at the time of a power failure recovery, the interest of the game can be enhanced by the sound effects.
In the present embodiment, the sound effect is not output when the display of the decorative special figure start memory display is resumed (when the display of the special special figure start memory display is resumed after a power failure). It is also possible to output a sound effect when restarting the start memory display.

It is also possible to output a sound effect when the decoration special figure start memory display is switched from the still image mode to the moving image mode, or to output a sound effect when the display is switched from the video mode to the still image mode. It is possible to output sound effects when switching from the first still image mode to the second still image mode different from the first still image mode, and from the first moving image mode to the first It is also possible to output sound effects when switching to the second moving image mode different from the moving image mode.
That is, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the display mode of the start memory display (decoration special figure start memory display) includes a first moving image mode and a second moving image mode, and an effect control means (effect control device) 300), when the display mode of the start memory display is switched from the first video mode to the second video mode, sound effects are output from the sound source device (speakers 19a, 19b) and the start memory display is displayed. When a power failure occurs and the display of the start memory display resumes after the power failure is recovered, the sound source device can be configured not to output a sound effect.
Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the display mode of the start memory display (decoration special figure start memory display) includes a moving image mode and a still image mode, and the effect control means (effect control device 300) is When the display mode of the start memory display is switched from the moving image mode to the still image mode, a sound effect is output from the sound source device (speakers 19a and 19b), and a power failure occurs while the start memory display is displayed. When the display of the start memory display is resumed after recovering from the power failure, the sound source device can be configured not to output the sound effect.
Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the display mode of the start memory display (decoration special figure start memory display) includes a first still image mode and a second still image mode, and an effect control means (effect When the display mode of the start memory display is switched from the first still image mode to the second still image mode, the control device 300) outputs a sound effect from the sound source device (speakers 19a, 19b), and the start memory display is displayed. When a power failure occurs in a state where the sound is generated and the display of the start-up memory display is resumed after the recovery from the power failure, the sound source device can be configured not to output a sound effect.
By configuring in this way, the interest of the game can be enhanced.

<Decoration start memory display>
An example of the decorative special figure start memory display displayed on the display device 41 will be described with reference to FIGS. 52 to 65, the “center of gravity (center)” of the decoration special figure start memory display is indicated by a point, but such “center of gravity” is not actually displayed. Further, in FIG. 52 to FIG. 65, there is a case where the “fixed position” of the decorative special figure start memory display is indicated by a one-dot chain line, but such “fixed position” is not actually displayed. 52 to 65, “auxiliary lines” or the like are indicated by broken lines, but such “auxiliary lines” or the like are not actually displayed.
In the present embodiment, since the special figure variation display game is executed in the order of winning in the start winning area, for example, as shown in FIG. 52, a maximum of eight decorative special figure start memory displays are displayed on the standby hold display portion 41b. Is done.

Hereinafter, the decorative special figure start memory display displayed on the standby hold display unit 41b is referred to as “standby hold”, and the decorative special figure start storage display displayed on the execution hold display unit 41c is referred to as “active hold”. Furthermore, the waiting hold corresponding to the first oldest start memory (that is, the start memory stored first) is called “waiting hold 1” and corresponds to the second oldest start memory. The waiting hold is called “holding hold 2”, and the waiting hold corresponding to the 3rd to 8th oldest start memories is called “waiting hold 3”, “waiting hold 4”, and “waiting hold”. 5 "," Waiting Hold 6 "," Waiting Hold 7 "and" Waiting Hold 8 ". When the number of undigested start-up memories is 8, the waiting hold 1 is displayed at the position closest to the running hold display unit 41c (in the case of the present embodiment, the left end of the standby hold display unit 41b). The on-hold hold 8 is displayed at the position farthest from the on-hold hold display portion 41c (in the present embodiment, the right end of the stand-by hold display portion 41b).
52 to 65 exemplify the case where eight pending holds are displayed, but of course, the number of pending holds is not limited to eight, and depends on the number of unstarted startup memories. Number.

For example, as shown in FIG. 52, the center-of-gravity interval (inter-center-of-center distance) between adjacent on-hold holds is set to a distance d1. That is, the waiting hold is arranged at equal intervals. Therefore, when a plurality of waiting holds are displayed (that is, when there are a plurality of unsettled start memories), these waiting holds can be arranged in the waiting hold display portion 41b in an attractive manner.
For example, as shown in FIG. 52, the center-of-gravity interval between the pending suspension and the waiting suspension (standby suspension 1) adjacent to the pending suspension is set to a distance d0 longer than the distance d1. That is, the on-hold hold is arranged away from the waiting hold group. Therefore, since there is a difference between the center-of-gravity interval between the on-hold hold and the on-hold hold and the center of gravity interval between the on-hold hold, the on-hold hold and the on-hold hold can be easily determined.

In the present embodiment, when the special figure variation display game starts, the production control device 300 starts a hold shift production in which the decorative special figure start memory display shifts to the next.
Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 53, when the special figure variation display game is finished, the on-hold suspension (decorative special figure start storage display with lattice hatching in the figure) disappears. Then, when the next special figure fluctuation display game is started, the waiting hold corresponding to the next special figure fluctuation display game, that is, the waiting hold 1 (decoration special figure start storage display with polka dot hatching in the figure) is performed. While shifting (moving) from the standby hold display unit 41b to the on-hold display unit 41c to become the on-hold hold, the on-hold hold that does not correspond to the next special figure variation display game, that is, the on-hold hold 2 to 8 (see FIG. The decorative special figure start memory display with hatching in the middle is shifted (moved) in the standby hold display portion 41b to become standby holds 1-7.

During the hold shift effect, the standby hold (standby hold 2 to 8) moving in the standby hold display unit 41b is shifted in a state in which the center-of-gravity interval between adjacent standby holds is maintained at the distance d1.
Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 54, the standby holdings (standby holdings 2 to 8) moving in the standby holding display unit 41b start shifting at the same timing (t31), respectively. The shift ends at the same timing (t32) and shifts at the same moving speed. As a result, the standby hold (standby hold 2 to 8) moving in the standby hold display unit 41b is in the standby hold (the standby hold 1 is adjacent to the center of gravity G1 of the standby hold and the standby hold). The distance from the center of gravity G1 can be shifted while maintaining a constant distance.
Here, “starting a shift” means starting from a fixed position before shifting, and “ending a shift” means arriving at a fixed position after shifting. For example, as shown in FIG. 54, in the standby hold 8, the fixed position before the shift is the fixed position of the standby hold 8, and the fixed position after the shift is the fixed position of the standby hold 7.

Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 54, the on-hold hold that moves to the on-hold hold display unit 41c is on-hold hold (standby hold 2 to 8) that moves within the stand-by hold display unit 41b. In order to start the shift at the same timing and finish the shift at the same timing, the shift is performed at a higher speed than the standby hold (standby hold 2 to 8) that shifts within the standby hold display portion 41b.
The moving distance of the on-hold hold (standby hold 2 to 8) moving in the standby hold display unit 41b is the distance d1, and the standby hold (standby hold 1) moving to the on-hold hold display unit 41c is moved. The distance is a distance d0 longer than the distance d1. Therefore, in order to make the shift start timing and the shift end timing the same as the on-hold hold (standby hold 2 to 8) that moves in the standby hold display unit 41b, the shift to the on-hold hold display unit 41c is on standby The hold (standby hold 1) needs to be shifted at a higher speed than the standby hold (standby hold 2 to 8) that shifts within the standby hold display section 41b. Thus, the waiting hold (standby hold 1) moving to the running hold display unit 41c gradually changes the center-of-gravity interval with the waiting hold (standby hold 2) adjacent to the waiting hold ( Specifically, the shift is performed while gradually increasing from the distance d1.

In the example shown in FIG. 54, each on-hold hold (standby hold 1 to 8) is shifted in a state where the moving speed is kept constant, but each on-hold hold (standby hold 1 to 8). The moving speed may not be constant. Specifically, during the on-hold shift effect, each on-hold hold (standby hold 1 to 8) can be shifted while gradually decelerating. For example, as shown in FIG. It is also possible to shift.
Even when the moving speed is not constant, for example, as shown in FIG. 55, by making the shift start timing and the moving speed (instantaneous moving speed) the same, the standby holding (moving on standby) moving in the standby holding display unit 41b is performed. The reservations 2 to 8) can be shifted in a state where the center-of-gravity distance between adjacent waiting reservations is maintained at the distance d1.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 54, the on-hold hold (standby hold 1) that moves to the on-hold hold display unit 41c is more than the on-hold hold (standby holds 2 to 8) that moves inside the stand-by hold display unit 41b. However, it is not limited to this.
Specifically, during the hold shift effect, the on-hold hold (standby hold 1) that moves to the on-hold hold display unit 41c is the on-hold hold (standby hold 2 to 8) that moves within the standby hold display unit 41b. For example, as shown in FIG. 56, the shift may be performed at the same movement speed as the standby hold (standby hold 2 to 8) that moves in the standby hold display portion 41b. good.

  As described above, the moving distance of the on-hold hold (standby hold 2 to 8) that moves in the stand-by display unit 41b is the distance d1, and the on-hold hold (on standby) that moves to the on-hold hold display unit 41c The movement distance of the hold 1) is a distance d0 longer than the distance d1. Therefore, the waiting hold (standby hold 1) that moves to the on-hold hold display unit 41c is shifted at the same moving speed as the waiting hold (standby hold 2 to 8) that moves within the waiting hold display unit 41b. In this case, for example, as shown in FIG. 56, even if each on-hold hold (standby hold 1 to 8) starts shifting at the same timing (t35), the stand-by moves in the stand-by hold display section 41b first. The shift of the on-hold hold (standby hold 2 to 8) ends (t36), and then the shift of the on-hold hold (standby hold 1) that moves to the on-hold hold display unit 41c ends (t37). At that time, the on-hold hold (standby hold 1) moving to the on-hold hold display unit 41c is not changed until the shift of the on-hold hold (standby hold 2 to 8) moving on the standby hold display unit 41b is completed. (T35 to t36), shifting in a state where the distance between the center of gravity with the adjacent waiting hold (standby hold 2) is maintained at the distance d1, and moving in the standby hold display unit 41b (waiting hold 2 to 2). After the shift of 8) is completed (t36 to t37), the center-of-gravity interval with the adjacent waiting hold (standby hold 2) is shifted while gradually increasing from the distance d1.

In addition, the shift start timing of the standby hold (standby hold 1) that moves to the on-hold hold display unit 41c and the shift start timing of the standby hold (standby hold 2 to 8) that moves within the standby hold display unit 41b. Is not necessarily the same.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 57, for example, during the hold shift effect, the on-hold hold (standby hold 1) that moves to the on-hold hold display unit 41c is on standby to move within the stand-by hold display unit 41b. The shift may be started at a timing earlier than the hold (holding hold 2 to 8). In this case, the waiting hold (waiting hold 2 to 8) moving in the waiting hold display portion 41b is shifted following the waiting hold (standby hold 1) moving to the running hold display portion 41c. Can perform a hold shift effect.
In the example shown in FIG. 57, the standby hold (standby hold 2 to 8) moving in the standby hold display portion 41b is the standby hold (standby hold 1) moving to the active hold display portion 41c. The shift is started before the timing (t40) when the shift ends, but the timing for starting the shift of the standby hold (standby hold 2 to 8) that moves in the standby hold display unit 41b is being executed. It may be before, at the same time as, or after the timing (t40) for ending the shift of the waiting hold (standby hold 1) to move to the hold display portion 41c.

Or, for example, as shown in FIG. 58, during the hold shift effect, the waiting hold (standby hold 1) that moves to the running hold display unit 41c is the standby hold (standby) that moves within the standby hold display unit 41b. The shift may be started at a timing later than the middle suspension 2-8). In this case, the standby hold (standby hold 1) moving to the active hold display unit 41c is changed to the standby hold display unit by the shift of the standby hold (standby hold 2 to 8) that moves in the standby hold display unit 41b. A hold shift effect that is pushed out from 41b can be performed.
In the example shown in FIG. 58, the on-hold hold (standby hold 1) that moves to the on-hold hold display unit 41c is the on-hold hold (standby hold 2 to 8) that moves inside the stand-by hold display unit 41b. Although the shift is started before the timing (t44) when the shift ends, the timing for starting the shift of the standby hold (standby hold 1) that moves to the executing hold display unit 41c is the standby hold display unit. It may be before, at the same time as, or after the timing (t44) for ending the shift of the waiting hold (standby hold 2 to 8) moving within 41b.

Moreover, the shift start timings of the waiting hold (standby hold 2 to 8) moving in the waiting hold display section 41b may not be the same.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 59, for example, during the hold shift effect, the on-hold hold (standby hold 2 to 8) moving in the stand-by hold display unit 41b is on standby close to the on-hold hold display unit 41c. The shift may be started in order from middle suspension. In this case, the on-hold hold (standby hold 2 to 8) moving in the stand-by display unit 41b follows the immediately preceding on-hold hold (that is, the on-hold hold on the side of the on-hold hold display unit 41c). A hold shift effect such as shifting can be performed. However, in this case, the standby hold (standby hold 2 to 8) moving in the standby hold display portion 41b is shifted in a state where the center-of-gravity interval between adjacent standby holds is not maintained at the distance d1.

In the example shown in FIG. 59, the standby hold (standby hold 1) that moves to the pending hold display unit 41c is more than the standby hold (standby holds 2 to 8) that moves within the standby hold display unit 41b. Although the shift has started before, the timing for starting the shift of the standby hold (standby hold 1) that moves to the on-hold hold display unit 41c is the on-hold hold that moves within the standby hold display unit 41b ( The waiting hold that shifts first among the waiting holds 2 to 8) may be before, simultaneously with, or after the timing (t47) at which the shift starts.
In the example shown in FIG. 59, the waiting hold (standby hold 2 to 8) moving in the waiting hold display unit 41b starts shifting before the timing of the previous waiting hold shift ends. However, the timing for starting the shift of the standby hold (standby hold 2 to 8) that moves in the standby hold display portion 41b is before, at the same time as, after the timing of ending the previous standby hold shift. Either may be sufficient. That is, for example, the waiting hold 8 starts shifting before the timing of the shift of the waiting hold 7 that is the previous waiting hold, but the timing of starting the waiting hold 8 is It may be before, at the same time as, or after the timing for ending the shift of the waiting hold 7.

  Or, for example, as shown in FIG. 60, during the hold shift effect, the standby hold (standby hold 2 to 8) moving in the standby hold display part 41b is from the standby hold far from the active hold display part 41c. The shift may be started in order. In this case, the on-hold hold (standby hold 2 to 8) that moves in the stand-by display unit 41b is immediately on-hold hold (that is, the on-hold hold adjacent to the opposite side to the on-hold hold display unit 41c). With this shift, it is possible to perform a hold shift effect that is pushed out from a fixed position (specifically, a fixed position before the shift). However, also in this case, the on-hold hold (standby hold 2 to 8) moving in the stand-by display unit 41b is shifted in a state where the center of gravity interval between the adjacent on-hold holds is not maintained at the distance d1. .

In the example shown in FIG. 60, the on-hold hold (standby hold 1) that moves to the on-hold hold display unit 41c is more than the on-hold hold (standby holds 2 to 8) that moves inside the stand-by hold display unit 41b. Although the shift is started later, the timing for starting the shift of the standby hold (standby hold 1) that moves to the pending hold display unit 41c is the standby hold (standby) that moves within the standby hold display unit 41b. Among the middle holdings 2 to 8), the waiting holding that shifts last may be before, at the same time, or after the timing (t60) at which the shift starts.
In the example shown in FIG. 60, the waiting hold (standby hold 2 to 8) moving in the waiting hold display section 41b starts shifting before the timing of the immediately waiting hold shift ends. However, the timing of starting the shift of the standby hold (standby hold 2 to 8) that moves in the standby hold display portion 41b is before, at the same time, after the timing of ending the shift of the standby hold immediately after Either may be sufficient. That is, for example, the waiting hold 7 has started shifting before the timing of the waiting hold 8, which is the waiting hold immediately after the end of the shift, but the timing of starting the waiting hold 7 is It may be before, at the same time as, or after the timing for ending the shift of the waiting hold 8.

  Further, the moving speeds of the on-hold hold (standby hold 2 to 8) moving in the standby hold display section 41b may not be the same. Also in this case, the on-hold hold (standby hold 2 to 8) moving in the stand-by hold display section 41b is shifted in a state where the center-of-gravity interval between the adjacent on-hold holds is not maintained at the distance d1.

It should be noted that the shift start timing of each of the above-described on-hold suspensions (standby suspensions 1 to 8), whether or not to shift in a state where the movement speed is kept constant, the movement speed, and the like can be appropriately combined.
That is, in the examples shown in FIGS. 56 to 60, each on-hold hold (standby hold 1 to 8) is shifted in a state where the moving speed is kept constant, but in the examples shown in FIGS. 56 to 60. Each waiting hold (standby holdings 1 to 8) can be shifted while changing the moving speed.
In the example shown in FIGS. 57 to 60, the waiting hold (standby hold 1) that moves to the pending hold display unit 41c is the waiting hold (standby hold 2 to 2) that moves within the wait hold display unit 41b. In the example shown in FIG. 57 to FIG. 60, the on-hold hold (standby hold 1) that moves to the on-hold hold display unit 41c moves within the stand-by hold display unit 41b. Shifting at a lower speed than waiting hold (waiting hold 2 to 8) or shifting at the same moving speed as waiting hold (standby hold 2 to 8) moving in the waiting hold display section 41b You may do it.

Here, it is also possible to make the display mode of the on-hold hold different from the display mode of the on-hold hold. In other words, it is possible to display the on-hold hold in a display mode that is not selected as the display mode of the on-hold hold.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 61, for example, the display area (size) of pending execution may be larger than the display area of standby pending. Alternatively, the display area of pending execution may be smaller than the display area of waiting hold. Note that the display mode to be different may be other than the display area, and may be, for example, a shape or a color.
When the display mode (for example, display area) is different between the on-hold hold and the on-hold hold, the on-hold hold (standby hold 1) that moves to the on-hold hold display unit 41c arrives at the on-hold hold display unit 41c. The display mode may change, or the display mode may change during the shift to the on-hold display unit 41c.

Further, when the display mode (for example, the display area) is different between the on-hold hold and the on-hold hold, for example, as shown in FIG. The center-of-gravity interval with 1) may be set to a distance d1 that is the same as the center-of-gravity interval between adjacent waiting suspensions.
If the display mode (for example, the display area) is the same between the pending hold and the pending hold, the pending hold is executed as shown in FIG. The difference in the center of gravity between the on-hold hold and the center-of-gravity interval between the stand-by holds is set. On the other hand, when the display mode (for example, display area) is different between the on-hold hold and the on-hold hold, the on-hold hold and the on-hold hold can be distinguished by the difference in the display mode. Therefore, if the display mode is different between the on-hold hold and the on-hold hold, it is possible to distinguish between the on-hold hold and the on-hold hold without providing a difference in the center of gravity interval. That is, when the display mode is different between the pending hold and the pending hold, for example, as shown in FIG. 62, the center of gravity of the pending hold and the waiting hold (standby hold 1) adjacent to the currently held hold. Even if the interval is set to the distance d1 which is the same as the center-of-gravity interval between adjacent waiting holds, there is no inconvenience that it is difficult to distinguish between the holding hold and the waiting hold.

It is also possible to place the on-hold hold out of the waiting hold column. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 52, the center of gravity G1 of each pending suspension is arranged on the straight line L, and the center of gravity G0 of the pending suspension is also arranged on the straight line L. As shown to 63 (a), it does not need to be arrange | positioned on the straight line L. FIG.
If the on-hold centroid G0 is not arranged on the straight line L (that is, on the same straight line as the waiting on-hold centroid G1), the on-hold centroid G0 and the one on-hold centroid G1 The line connecting the center of gravity G1 of the waiting hold adjacent to the one waiting hold forms a triangle having these three points as vertices. In the case of this embodiment, since the waiting hold is arranged at equal intervals, the center of gravity G0 of the on-hold hold, the center of gravity G1 of the one on-hold hold, and the stand-by hold adjacent to the one on-hold hold All the triangles having apexes at the three points with the center of gravity G1 have the same area.

  That is, for example, as shown in FIG. 63 (b), the area of the triangle T12 having three points of the center of gravity G0 of the pending holding 1, the center of gravity G11 of the waiting holding 1 and the center of gravity G12 of the waiting holding 2, and the execution The area of the triangle T23 whose apexes are the center of gravity G0 of the on-hold hold 2, the center of gravity G12 of the on-hold hold 2, and the center of gravity G13 of the hold on hold 3, and the center of gravity G0 of the on-hold hold 3 and the center of gravity G13 of the hold on hold 3 The area of the triangle T34 that has three points with the center of gravity G14 of the pending holding 4 as a vertex, and the three points of the center of gravity G0 of the pending holding 4, the center of gravity G14 of the waiting holding 4 and the center of gravity G15 of the waiting hold 5 are apexes. The area of the triangle T56, the area of the triangle T56 with the three points of the center of gravity G0 of the pending holding 5, the center of gravity G15 of the waiting holding 5 and the center of gravity G16 of the waiting holding 6, and the center of gravity G0 of the holding pending Waiting with the center of gravity G16 of the hold 6 The area of a triangle T67 whose apex is 3 points with the center of gravity G17 of the stay 7 and the triangle whose apex is 3 points of the center of gravity G0 of the pending holding G7, the center of gravity G17 of the waiting holding 7 and the center of gravity G18 of the waiting holding 8 The area of T78 is the same.

Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 63 (b), the on-hold gravity center G0 is not arranged on the straight line L, and the on-hold hold (on standby) adjacent to the on-hold hold. In the case where the center of gravity interval with the hold 1) is set to a distance d0 longer than the distance d1 (that is, the center of gravity interval between adjacent waiting on hold), the center of gravity G0 of the on-hold hold and the intersection P (specifically Is the intersection of the straight line L and the perpendicular line extending from the center of gravity G0 of the pending suspension to the straight line L) and the center of gravity G11 of the pending suspension 1 is the area of the triangle T01 that is the pending suspension Centroid G0, a waiting center of gravity G1 and a waiting center of gravity G1 adjacent to the waiting suspension, and triangles T12, T23, T34, T45, T56, T67. , T78 is larger than the area.
Further, the center of gravity G0 of the on-hold hold is not arranged on the straight line L, and the center-of-gravity interval between the on-hold hold and the stand-by hold (standby hold 1) adjacent to the on-hold hold is the distance d1 ( In other words, when the center of gravity interval between adjacent holdings on standby is set, the center of gravity G0 of the pending holding and the intersection P (specifically, the straight line L and the center of gravity G0 of the pending holding G The area of the triangle T01 whose apex is the three points of the center of gravity G11 of the pending holding 1 and the center of gravity G0 of the pending holding, the center of gravity G1 of the waiting pending, It is the same as the area of triangles T12, T23, T34, T45, T56, T67, and T78 having apexes at three points with the center of gravity G1 of the waiting hold adjacent to the waiting hold.

As described above, the center of gravity G0 of the on-hold pending, the center of gravity G1 of the on-hold pending, and the center of gravity G1 of the on-hold pending adjacent to the one on-hold pending, By considering a triangle whose apex is the center of gravity G0 of the hold, the intersection point P, and the center of gravity G11 of the hold 1 in the waiting state, for example, a decorative special design (identification information) at a position that does not overlap with the triangular area Can be stopped, a specific image (such as a cut-in image or a character image) can be displayed at a position that does not overlap these triangular areas, and the like. As a result, it is possible to execute an effect that ensures the visibility of both the decorative special figure start memory display and the other effect display.
Alternatively, for example, it is possible to display a specific image (such as a character image acting on the decoration special figure start memory display) at a position overlapping with these triangular areas. Thereby, effective display can be performed by effectively utilizing these triangular regions.

Even when the on-hold centroid G0 is not arranged on the straight line L, as in the case where the on-hold centroid G0 is arranged on the straight line L, the shift start timing of each on-hold hold in the hold shift effect, Whether or not to shift while keeping the moving speed constant, whether the moving speed is high or low, and the like can be selected as appropriate.
In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 63, the display area of pending execution is larger than the display area of standby pending, but is not limited to this. That is, in the case where the gravity center G0 of the on-hold hold is not arranged on the straight line L, the display area of the on-hold hold may be the same as the display area of the on-hold hold, or from the display area of the on-hold hold May be larger or smaller than the display area of the on-hold hold.
In the example shown in FIG. 63, the center-of-gravity interval between the on-hold hold and the standby hold (standby hold 1) adjacent to the on-hold hold is the distance d1 (that is, the center-of-gravity interval between adjacent standby holds). Although the distance d0 is set to be longer than that, the present invention is not limited to this. That is. In the case where the gravity center G0 of the pending hold is not arranged on the straight line L, the center-of-gravity interval between the pending hold and the waiting hold (standby hold 1) adjacent to the currently held hold is set to the distance d1. Alternatively, it may be set to a distance different from the distance d1.

Each on-hold hold (standby hold 1 to 8) may be shifted (that is, linearly moved) along the shortest path, for example, as shown in FIG. For example, as shown in FIG. 64 (b), it may be shifted (for example, moved so as to bounce) along a route different from the shortest route. When shifting along the shortest path or when shifting along a path different from the shortest path, for example, as shown in FIGS. 54 to 58, the shift start timing and the moving speed (instantaneous moving speed) are made the same. Thus, the on-hold hold (standby hold 2 to 8) moving in the stand-by display unit 41b can be shifted in a state in which the center-of-gravity interval between the adjacent on-hold holds is maintained at the distance d1.
Further, in the present embodiment, the straight line L on which the gravity centers G1 that are on hold are arranged is along the horizontal direction, but the straight line L may not be horizontal, for example, may be inclined.

Further, in this embodiment, it corresponds to the on-hold hold corresponding to the first start memory that is the right to execute the first special figure variable display game and the second start memory that is the right to execute the second special figure variable display game. Although it is displayed on the standby hold display unit 41b without dividing the standby hold, it is not limited to this. That is, the waiting hold corresponding to the first start memory that is the right to execute the first special figure variable display game and the standby hold corresponding to the second start memory that is the right to execute the second special figure variable display game. It is also possible to display them separately on the standby hold display unit 41b. In this case, for example, the waiting holding group corresponding to the first start memory and the waiting holding group corresponding to the second start memory may be displayed separately.
Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 65, the standby hold display unit 41b includes a first standby hold display unit 41b1 that is a standby hold display unit for the first startup storage, and a standby hold display for the second startup storage. And the second waiting hold display unit 41b2, the waiting holding closest to the second waiting hold display unit 41b2 among the waiting holds displayed on the first waiting hold display unit 41b1, and the second waiting hold display unit 41b2 The center-of-gravity interval with the waiting hold closest to the first waiting hold display portion 41b1 among the waiting hold displayed on the waiting hold display portion 41b2 may be set to a distance d2 longer than the distance d1.
With this configuration, it is possible to easily determine the standby hold corresponding to the first start memory and the standby hold corresponding to the second start memory based on the difference in the center of gravity interval.
When the standby hold display unit 41b is divided into the first standby hold display unit 41b1 and the second standby hold display unit 41b2, the on-hold hold display unit 41c is located at the left end in FIG. For example, the on-hold hold display unit 41c may be positioned between the first standby hold display unit 41b1 and the second standby hold display unit 41b2.

  When the on-hold hold display unit 41c is located between the first standby hold display unit 41b1 and the second standby hold display unit 41b2, the on-hold hold and the on-hold hold displayed on the first standby hold display unit 41b1 The center-of-gravity interval between the pending suspension adjacent to the pending suspension is different from a predetermined interval (the center-of-gravity interval between adjacent pending suspensions displayed on the first standby suspension display unit 41b1; for example, distance d1). 1 interval (e.g., distance d0) is set, and the priority interval between the on-hold hold and the stand-by hold adjacent to the on-hold hold among the on-hold hold displayed on the second standby hold display unit 41b2 is a predetermined interval. It may be set to a second interval (for example, distance d0) that is different from the interval (the center of gravity interval between adjacent on-hold reservations displayed on the second standby hold display unit 41b2; for example, distance d1). Further, the first interval and the second interval may be the same or different.

The standby hold display unit 41b is divided into a first standby hold display unit 41b1 that is a standby hold display unit for the first start memory and a second standby hold display unit 41b2 that is a standby hold display unit for the second start memory. If not, when the next special figure variation display game is started, the waiting hold displayed on the waiting hold display portion 41b is shifted by one to the running hold display portion 41c side. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 53, the standby hold displayed on the standby hold display portion 41b is shifted by one to the left.
On the other hand, when the standby hold display part 41b is divided into the first standby hold display part 41b1 and the second standby hold display part 41b2, when the next special figure variation display game starts, the next special figure fluctuation display When the game is the first special figure variation display game, the standby hold displayed on the first standby hold display part 41b1 is shifted by one to the running hold display part 41c, and the next special figure is displayed. When the variable display game is the second special figure variable display game, the standby hold displayed on the second standby hold display unit 41b2 is shifted by one to the running hold display unit 41c. Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 65, when the on-hold holding display unit 41c is located at the left end, when the next special figure variation display game is the first special figure variation display game, When the on-hold hold displayed on the 1-wait hold display portion 41b1 shifts by one to the left, and the next special figure fluctuation display game is the second special figure fluctuation display game, the second wait hold display The on-hold hold displayed on the part 41b2 is shifted to the left by one. For example, when the on-hold hold display unit 41c is located between the first standby hold display unit 41b1 and the second standby hold display unit 41b2, the next special figure fluctuation display game is the first special figure fluctuation display game. In the case where the waiting hold displayed on the first waiting hold display portion 41b1 shifts by one to the center side, and the next special figure fluctuation display game is the second special figure fluctuation display game The waiting hold displayed on the second waiting hold display portion 41b2 is shifted by one to the center side.

  Thus, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a game (special figure variation display game) is executed based on the establishment of the start condition, and the game value is given to the player when the result of the game becomes a special result. And a start storage means (game control device 100) capable of storing a start memory, which becomes a game execution right based on the establishment of the start condition, up to a predetermined number. And a start memory display control means (production control device 300) for performing display control of the start memory display (holding on hold) corresponding to the start memory, and in relation to the start of the game, the start memory corresponding to the game The display (standby hold 1) moves from the first display area (standby hold display part 41b) to the second display area (running hold display part 41c), and during the execution of the game, Floating memory display The center-of-gravity interval between adjacent start memory displays that are displayed as “pending during execution” is set to a predetermined interval (distance d1), and the change memory display and the start memory display adjacent to the change memory display (standby hold) The center-of-gravity interval with 1) is set to an interval (distance d0) different from the predetermined interval (see FIGS. 52, 61, 63, and 65).

Therefore, since the start memory display (holding on hold) is arranged at equal intervals, the start memory display suitably arranged in a limited display area can be displayed.
Further, since the changing memory display (pending on hold) is arranged away from the start memory display (holding on hold) group, the center-of-gravity interval between the changing memory display and the starting memory display, and the center-of-gravity interval between the starting memory displays Thus, the memory display during change and the start memory display can be easily determined.
The interval (distance d0) different from the predetermined interval (distance d1) may be wider than the predetermined interval or may be narrower than the predetermined interval.

In addition, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, in relation to the start of the game (special figure variation display game), the start memory display (standby hold 2 to 8) not corresponding to the game has a center of gravity interval of a predetermined interval. It can be configured to move in the first display area (standby hold display section 41b) while maintaining (distance d1) (see FIGS. 54 to 58).
By configuring in this way, in the on-hold shift effect, it is possible to shift the start memory display (standby on-hold 2 to 8) while maintaining a suitably arranged state.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the center-of-gravity interval between the changing memory display (pending on hold) and the starting storage display (standby holding 1) adjacent to the changing memory display is larger than a predetermined interval. The movement start timing when the start memory display (standby hold 1) corresponding to the game (special figure variation display game) is set to (distance d0) moves to the second display area (running hold display section 41c) ( The shift start timing is the same as the movement start timing when the start memory display (standby hold 2 to 8) that does not correspond to the game moves in the first display area (standby hold display portion 41b). The movement speed when the corresponding start memory display moves to the second display area can be configured to be faster than the movement speed when the start memory display that does not correspond to the game moves within the first display area (FIG. 5 , See Figure 55).
With this configuration, for example, each start memory display (standby hold 1 to 8) starts to move together, and only the start memory display (standby hold 1) corresponding to the game shifts at a high speed, and the shift is in progress. In addition, a novel hold shift effect can be performed in which the distance between the start memory display corresponding to the game (standby hold 1) and the start memory display adjacent to the start memory display (standby hold 2) is increased. it can.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the movement when the start memory display (standby hold 1) corresponding to the game (special figure variation display game) moves to the second display area (running hold display section 41c). The start timing (shift start timing) seems to be earlier than the movement start timing when the start memory display (standby hold 2 to 8) not corresponding to the game moves in the first display area (standby hold display portion 41b). Configuration is possible (see FIGS. 57 and 59).
With this configuration, the start memory display (standby hold 1) corresponding to the game moves first, so that attention can be focused on the start memory display corresponding to the game.
In addition, following the start memory display corresponding to the game (standby hold 1), a novel hold shift effect such that the start memory display not corresponding to the game (standby hold 2 to 8) is shifted may be performed. it can.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the movement when the start memory display (standby hold 1) corresponding to the game (special figure variation display game) moves to the second display area (running hold display section 41c). The end timing (shift end timing) seems to be later than the movement end timing when the start memory display (standby hold 2 to 8) not corresponding to the game moves in the first display area (standby hold display portion 41b). Configuration is possible (see FIGS. 56, 58, and 60).
With this configuration, since the start memory display (standby hold 1) corresponding to the game has moved to the end, attention can be drawn to the start memory display corresponding to the game.

Furthermore, the movement end timing (shift end timing) when the start memory display (standby hold 1) corresponding to the game (special figure change display game) moves to the second display area (running hold display portion 41c) is as follows: The start memory display not corresponding to the game (standby hold 2-8) is later than the movement end timing when moving in the first display area (standby hold display portion 41b), and
The movement start timing (shift start timing) when the start memory display (standby hold 1) corresponding to the game (special variable display game) moves to the second display area (running hold display section 41c) is the game. The start storage display (standby hold 2 to 8) that does not correspond to can be configured to be later than the movement start timing when moving in the first display area (standby hold display portion 41b) (FIGS. 58 and 60). reference).
With this configuration, the start memory display (standby hold 1) corresponding to the game is changed to the first display area (standby hold display section) by shifting the start memory display (standby hold 2 to 8) not corresponding to the game. A novel hold shift effect such as being pushed out from 41b) can be performed.

In addition, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a game (special figure fluctuation display game) is executed based on the establishment of the start condition, and a game value is given to the player when the result of the game becomes a special result. And a start storage means (game control device 100) capable of storing a start memory, which becomes a game execution right based on the establishment of the start condition, up to a predetermined number, and a start Start memory display control means (production control device 300) for performing display control of start memory display (holding on hold) corresponding to memory, and the center-of-gravity interval between adjacent start memory displays is a predetermined interval (distance d1) (See FIG. 52, FIG. 61 to FIG. 63, FIG. 65).
Therefore, since the start memory display (holding on hold) is arranged at equal intervals, a suitably arranged start memory display can be displayed.

In addition, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, in relation to the start of the game (special figure fluctuation display game), the start memory display (standby hold 1) corresponding to the game is displayed in the first display area (standby hold). While moving from the display unit 41b) to the second display area (the on-hold hold display section 41c) and being displayed in the second display area, the game is displayed as a variable memory display (pending on hold) and the game. The start memory display (standby hold 2 to 8) that does not correspond to is moved in the first display area, and the display mode of the changing memory display (in this embodiment, the display area) is the display mode of the start memory display (See FIGS. 61 to 63 and FIG. 65).
With this configuration, it is possible to easily distinguish between the memory display during fluctuation and the start memory display depending on the display mode.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the display mode is a display area, and the display area of the memory display during change (pending on hold) is larger than the display area of the start memory display (pending hold) The center-of-gravity interval between the intermediate memory display and the start memory display (standby hold 1) adjacent to the changing memory display is set to a predetermined interval (distance d1), and the start memory display corresponding to the game (standby hold 1). The movement start timing (shift start timing) when moving to the second display area (execution hold display section 41c) is the start storage display (standby hold 2 to 8) not corresponding to the game in the first display area ( It can be configured to be the same as the movement start timing when moving in the standby hold display section 41b) (see FIGS. 62 and 54 to 56).
By configuring in this way, for example, each start memory display (standby hold 1 to 8) starts to move together, only the start memory display corresponding to the game (standby hold 1) expands, It is possible to perform a novel hold shift effect in which the distance between the start memory display corresponding to the game (standby hold 1) and the start memory display adjacent to the start memory display (standby hold 2) is shortened.
The display mode is not limited to the display area (size), and may be a shape or a color.

  In addition, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a game (special figure fluctuation display game) is executed based on the establishment of the start condition, and a game value is given to the player when the result of the game becomes a special result. And a start storage means (game control device 100) capable of storing a start memory, which becomes a game execution right based on the establishment of the start condition, up to a predetermined number, and a start Start memory display control means (production control device 300) for performing display control of start memory display (holding on hold) corresponding to the memory, and the start memory display control means is related to the start of the game. The center-of-gravity interval between adjacent start memory displays (standby holds 2 to 8) is moved while the display position of the display is moved, and the display position of the start memory display is moving (that is, the hold shift effect is being executed). Set to interval It can be configured to be (see FIG. 59, FIG. 60).

Accordingly, the start memory display is arranged at equal intervals during a period other than during the movement of the display position of the start memory display (holding hold), that is, when the hold shift effect is not being executed. Can be displayed.
Further, the start memory display (standby hold 2 to 8) shifts (moves) without maintaining the state of being arranged at equal intervals. Accordingly, a start shift display that shifts the start memory display (standby hold 3 to 8) to follow the immediately preceding start store display (standby hold 2 to 7), or a start memory display (standby hold 2 to 7). ) Performs a novel hold shift effect such as a hold shift effect that shifts to be pushed from a fixed position (specifically, the fixed position before the shift) by the start memory display (standby hold 3 to 8) immediately after. be able to.

In addition, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a game (special figure fluctuation display game) is executed based on the establishment of the start condition, and a game value is given to the player when the result of the game becomes a special result. And a start storage means (game control device 100) capable of storing a start memory, which becomes a game execution right based on the establishment of the start condition, up to a predetermined number, and a start A start memory display control means (production control device 300) for performing display control of a start memory display (holding on hold) corresponding to the memory, and in association with the start of the game, a start memory display ( The waiting hold 1) moves from the first display area (standby hold display part 41b) to the second display area (running hold display part 41c), and is changing in the second display area during the execution of the game. Memory display (execution A triangle (for example, a triangle T12) whose apex is three points of the center of gravity G1, G1 of the pair of starting storage displays adjacent to each other and the center of gravity G0 of the changing storage display, and other adjacent The triangles (for example, triangles T23, T34, T45, T56, T67, T78) having apexes at the three points of the center of gravity G1, G1 of the pair of starting storage displays and the center of gravity G0 of the changing storage display have the same area. (See FIG. 63).
Therefore, since the start memory display (holding on hold) is arranged at equal intervals, a suitably arranged start memory display can be displayed.
The “triangles” referred to here, that is, the triangles T12 to T78, are virtual triangles formed by virtual lines, and are not displayed on the display device 41.

  In addition, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a game (special figure fluctuation display game) is executed based on the establishment of the start condition, and a game value is given to the player when the result of the game becomes a special result. And a start storage means (game control device 100) capable of storing a start memory, which becomes a game execution right based on the establishment of the start condition, up to a predetermined number, and a start A start memory display control means (production control device 300) for performing display control of a start memory display (holding on hold) corresponding to the memory, and in association with the start of the game, a start memory display ( The waiting hold 1) moves from the first display area (standby hold display part 41b) to the second display area (running hold display part 41c), and is changing in the second display area during the execution of the game. Memory display (execution The center of gravity G1 of the start memory display is arranged on a predetermined straight line (straight line L), and the center of gravity G1 and G1 of the pair of start memory displays adjacent to each other and the center of gravity G0 of the memory display during fluctuation are displayed. A triangle (for example, a triangle T12) having a vertex as a vertex, and a vertex (for example, a point having three points of the centroids G1 and G1 of another pair of startup memory displays adjacent to each other and the centroid G0 of the memory display during change) The triangles T23, T34, T45, T56, T67, and T78) have the same area, the intersection point P between the perpendicular line drawn from the center of gravity G0 of the changing memory display and the predetermined line, and the changing memory display. The center of gravity G1 of the adjacent start memory display (standby hold 1), the center of gravity G0 of the memory display during change, the triangle T01 having the vertex, and the center of gravity G1 of the pair of start memory displays adjacent to each other G1 A triangle T12, T23, T34, T45, T56, T67, T78 whose vertices three points and the center of gravity G0 of the variation in storage display, the can be configured differently so that the area (see Figure 63).

Therefore, since the start memory display (holding on hold) is arranged at equal intervals, a suitably arranged start memory display can be displayed.
Further, since the changing memory display (pending on hold) is arranged away from the start memory display (holding on hold) group, the center-of-gravity interval between the changing memory display and the starting memory display, and the center-of-gravity interval between the starting memory displays Thus, the memory display during change and the start memory display can be easily determined.
It should be noted that the intersection point P of the perpendicular line drawn from the center of gravity G0 of the memory display during variation to a predetermined straight line (straight line L) and the predetermined straight line, and the center of gravity G1 of the start memory display (standby hold 1) adjacent to the memory display during variation The area of the triangle T01 whose apex is the three points of the center G0 of the memory display during change and the center G0 of the change memory display and the center G1 of the pair of start-up storage displays adjacent to each other and the center G0 of the memory display during change The area may be larger or smaller than the area of the triangles T12, T23, T34, T45, T56, T67, and T78 having the point as a vertex.
Further, the “triangles” referred to here, that is, the triangles T01 to T78, are virtual triangles formed by virtual lines, and are not displayed on the display device 41.

<On-hold expansion production>
Moreover, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment can execute the hold expansion effect. This hold expansion effect is an effect that is executed during a specific mode that can be shifted in a specific game state (for example, a short time state), and expands the standby hold display unit 41b to the entire display area of the display device 41, and This is an effect of displaying a waiting hold larger than the waiting hold displayed during a period other than the execution of the hold expansion effect.
FIG. 66 (a) shows an example of display on the display device 41 during execution of the hold expansion effect.
When executing the hold expansion effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 66A, a standby hold display unit 41b is provided in the entire display area of the display device 41, and the corner of the display area of the display device 41 (in this embodiment). , The upper part) is provided with a pending display part 41c, a small symbol variation display part 41d, and a number hold display part 41e. That is, the on-hold hold display unit 41c, the small symbol variation display unit 41d, and the numeric hold display unit 41e are provided on the front side of the standby hold display unit 41b so as to overlap the standby hold display unit 41b.

In the standby hold display portion 41b, vertically long rectangular standby holds are displayed side by side, and the center-of-gravity interval (inter-centroid distance) between adjacent standby holds is set to a distance d1.
In the present embodiment, since the special figure variation display game is executed in the order of winning in the start winning area, a maximum of eight on-hold holds are displayed on the stand-by hold display unit 41b during a period other than the execution of the hold expansion effect. It is possible (see FIG. 52). On the other hand, at the time of execution of the hold expansion effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 66 (a), the standby hold display unit 41b is configured to display a maximum of four standby holds. That is, even when the number of undigested start-up memories is 5 or more, it is configured to display only the waiting suspensions 1 to 4.
Each shape of the waiting holdings 1 to 4 is the same as the shape of the area obtained by vertically dividing the display area of the display device 41 into four, and each display area (size) of the waiting holdings 1 to 4 is displayed. The display area of the device 41 is the same as the area of the area obtained by dividing the display area into four equal parts. Therefore, when all of the waiting holdings 1 to 4 are displayed, the background image and the decoration special figure fluctuation display game displayed on the decoration special figure fluctuation display game display unit 41a are hidden in the waiting holdings 1 to 4. Become invisible. Further, in the present embodiment, the on-hold hold is displayed on the near side of the on-hold hold 1 so as to overlap the on-hold hold 1.

For example, as shown in FIG. 66 (b), the display mode of the on-hold hold displayed at the time of execution of the hold expansion effect includes a pre-read result such as a result of a special figure fluctuation display game or a fluctuation pattern based on the corresponding start memory. There are a normal display mode (default display mode) that does not suggest and a suggestion mode that suggests a prefetch result such as a result or a variation pattern of a special figure variation display game based on the corresponding start memory. Furthermore, the suggestion modes include the suggestion mode A having the lowest expectation level (expectation level to be a big hit, the expectation level of reach occurrence, etc.), the suggestion mode B having a higher expectation level than the suggestion mode A, and the suggestion mode B There is a suggestion mode C with high expectation.
For example, as shown in FIG. 66 (b), a facial expression image representing no facial expression (for example, a smile degree of 0%) is displayed in the normal on-hold hold, and in the suggested hold B in the on-hold hold. A facial expression image representing a smile (for example, a smile degree of 30%) is displayed, and a facial expression image representing a smile (for example, a smile degree of 100%) is displayed in the waiting state of the suggestion mode C. On the other hand, none of the images are displayed within the waiting hold of the suggestion mode A.

  As described above, the display mode of the on-hold hold corresponding to the start memory won in the standby hold change effect lottery is changed to the suggestion mode at a predetermined timing (or displayed in a state changed from the beginning to the suggestion mode). ) Which of the suggestion modes A to C is changed is determined in the lottery or the like of the standby hold change effect. For example, when the result of the special figure fluctuation display game corresponding to the change target standby hold is out of place The suggestion mode A is most easily selected from among the suggestion modes A to C, and the suggestion mode C is most easily selected from the suggestion modes A to C when it is a big hit.

Furthermore, when the hold expansion effect is executed, predetermined information (expectation in the case of the present embodiment) can be suggested by the display area of the hold on hold. Specifically, for example, the display area of the on-hold hold displayed when the hold expansion effect is executed is a medium display area (default display) equal to the area of the display area of the display device 41 divided into four equal parts. Area), a large display area larger than the middle display area, and a small display area smaller than the middle display area.
For example, if the display area lottery is performed after winning the lottery of the standby hold change effect, and the display area lottery is won, the display of the standby hold is displayed when the display mode of the standby hold changes to the suggestion mode. The area changes to a large display area or a small display area. Alternatively, the on-hold hold may be displayed with the display mode changed from the beginning to the suggestion mode. In that case, when the display area lottery is won, the standby hold has a large display area from the beginning. Or it displays in the state changed to the small display area.
Whether the display area is changed to the large display area or the small display area is determined by a display area lottery or the like. In this case, a small display area is more easily selected than a large display area, and a large display area is more easily selected than a small display area when it is a big hit. That is, the large display area has higher expectation than the small display area. Note that the large display area may be less expected than the small display area.

For example, in the example shown in FIG. 67A, the display area of the on-hold hold 3 is a large display area, and the display areas of the other on-hold holds (that is, the on-hold hold 1, 2, 4) are medium display areas. . The waiting hold 3 is displayed on the front side of the waiting hold 2 and the waiting hold 4 so as to overlap the waiting hold 2 and the waiting hold 4. For example, as shown in FIG. 67 (a), even if any display area of the plurality of on-hold holds is a large display area, all the display areas of the plurality of on-hold holds are the middle display area. Similar to (see FIG. 66 (a)), the center-of-gravity interval (inter-center of gravity distance) between adjacent on-hold suspensions is set to the distance d1.
Further, for example, in the example shown in FIG. 67B, the display area of the standby hold 2 is a small display area, and the display areas of other standby holds (that is, the standby holds 1, 3, and 4) are medium display areas. It is. For example, as shown in FIG. 67 (b), even if any display area of the plurality of on-hold holds is a small display area, all the display areas of the plurality of on-hold holds are the middle display area. Similar to (see FIG. 66 (a)), the center-of-gravity interval (inter-center of gravity distance) between adjacent on-hold suspensions is set to the distance d1.
In FIG. 66 and FIG. 67, for convenience, the “center of gravity (center)” on standby is indicated by a point, but such “center of gravity” is not actually displayed. 66 and 67, “auxiliary lines” and the like are indicated by broken lines for convenience, but such “auxiliary lines” and the like are not actually displayed.

As described above, the display mode of the on-hold hold displayed at the time of execution of the hold expansion effect includes a normal display mode (display area is only the middle display area), large display area suggestion modes A to C, and a middle display. There are area suggestion modes A to C and small display area suggestion modes A to C.
It is notified by the type of facial expression image that is displayed in the suggestion mode and is on hold (in this embodiment, “no facial expression image”, “facial expression image that indicates a smile”, and “facial expression image that indicates a smile”). This is a rough expectation. In addition to the types of facial expression images, it is possible to notify a more detailed expectation level by making it possible to change the display area on hold during standby.

Here, in the present embodiment, the concept of scenario data (scenario layer) is used in the rendering control of the display screen displayed on the display device 41. Scenarios are divided into a plurality of display layers (scenario layers) such as background scenarios, left symbol scenarios, right symbol scenarios, etc. This is a method for generating a picture of one screen by setting, individually controlling them as a scenario, and synthesizing all the scenarios.
A plurality of display layers (scenario layers) are categorized separately for each display element, for example, background, left design, right design,... It is set as a table of operation scenarios for switching and displaying effects.

In the present embodiment, the display elements (display components) used in the production of the display device 41 are “background”, “left symbol”, “right symbol”, “middle symbol”, “notice 1 character”, “notice” It is divided into 8 elements: “2 characters”, “hold display (decoration special figure start memory display)” and “small symbol”.
And the scenario table in display effects, such as a change effect, is produced for every display element. In the present embodiment, the scenario tables are “background control scenario table”, “left symbol control scenario table”, “right symbol control scenario table”, “middle symbol control scenario table”, “notice 1 character control”. It is created by being divided into eight elements: “scenario table”, “scenario table for notice 2 character control”, “scenario table for hold display control”, and “scenario table for small symbol control”.
Each display element is configured by a display layer, and a plurality of display layers are sequentially stacked from the back side of the screen toward the front side of the screen to create one display screen. In the case of the present embodiment, the display layer includes “background layer”, “left symbol layer”, “right symbol layer”, “middle symbol layer”, “notice A layer” to “notice F layer”, “hold layer”. And there are 12 types of “small design layer”.

In the effect display editing process (step C13) of the main process (FIG. 28), the effect control device 300 draws predetermined images in the virtual drawing space of the VRAM 326 in the order of the number of motion management areas in the order of the number of motion management areas ( That is, processing for pasting a sprite of a predetermined image into the virtual drawing space is performed.
As shown in FIG. 68, the virtual drawing space is divided into 12 drawing areas, ie, a motion management area 0 drawing area to a motion management area 11 drawing area. Each drawing area is arranged in the order of the number of the corresponding motion management area, and a display layer on which a predetermined image is drawn is stored in each drawing area.

Specifically, in the effect display editing process, the effect control device 300 first displays a “background layer” in which a predetermined image is rendered in the virtual rendering space when the data in the address area of the motion management area 0 is not NULL. Store in the motion management area 0 drawing area.
Next, when the data in the address area of the motion management area 1 is not NULL, the “notice A layer” in which the predetermined image is drawn is stored in the drawing area for the motion management area 1 in the virtual drawing space.
Next, when the data in the address area of the motion management area 2 is not NULL, the “notice B layer” in which the predetermined image is drawn is stored in the drawing area for the motion management area 2 in the virtual drawing space.

  Similarly, when the data in the address area of the motion management area 3 is not NULL, the “left symbol layer” is stored in the drawing area for the motion management area 3 in the virtual drawing space, and then the address area of the motion management area 4 is stored. If the data is not NULL, the “right symbol layer” is stored in the drawing area for the motion management area 4 in the virtual drawing space. Then, if the data in the address area of the motion management area 5 is not NULL, the “medium symbol layer” is virtual Store in the drawing area for the motion management area 5 in the drawing space, and then store “notice C layer” in the drawing area for the motion management area 6 in the virtual drawing space if the address area data in the motion management area 6 is not NULL. Then, if the data in the address area of the motion management area 7 is not NULL, “Notice D Ray Is stored in the drawing area for the motion management area 7 in the virtual drawing space, and when the data in the address area of the motion management area 8 is not NULL, the “hold layer” is stored in the drawing area for the motion management area 8 in the virtual drawing space. Then, when the data in the address area of the motion management area 9 is not NULL, the “notice E layer” is stored in the drawing area for the motion management area 9 in the virtual drawing space, and then in the address area of the motion management area 10 If the data is not NULL, the “notice F layer” is stored in the drawing area for the motion management area 10 in the virtual drawing space. Then, if the data in the address area of the motion management area 11 is not NULL, the “small symbol layer” is virtually displayed. Store in the drawing area for the motion management area 11 in the drawing space, and finish the effect display editing process. That.

  Here, when the data in the address area of the motion management area X is NULL, the display layer is not stored in the corresponding drawing area, and the drawing area remains blank. Specifically, for example, when the data in the address area of the motion management area 10 is NULL, a display layer (in the case of this embodiment, “notice F” is displayed in the drawing area for the motion management area 10 in the virtual drawing space of the VRAM 326. Since the layer “) is not stored, the drawing area for the motion management area 10 is left blank. It is possible to sequentially store the display layers so that non-blank drawing areas are continuous (that is, store the display layers in front of each other). In that case, one display screen is configured. Since the drawing area for storing display layers other than the background layer changes according to the number of display layers to be performed, each time these display layers are stored in the virtual drawing space, the drawing area for storing the display layer (that is, a blank area) It is necessary to search the drawing area on the foremost (first) side in the drawing area, and the processing becomes complicated accordingly. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by configuring each display layer to be stored in a predetermined drawing area regardless of the contents of the effect (that is, the number of display layers constituting one display screen), Since it is not necessary to search the drawing area for storing the display layer every time the display layer is stored in the virtual drawing space, the processing load can be reduced.

  The display layers stored in each drawing area are sequentially stacked from the rear side of the screen (lower layer side) to the front side of the screen (upper layer side) in the order of arrangement of the drawing areas to create one display screen. Specifically, in this embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 68, the “background layer” stored in the drawing area for the motion management area 1 located at the top of the 12 drawing areas is the most screen. “Small pattern layer” arranged in the drawing area for the motion management area 11 located on the back side (lowermost layer) and located at the end of the twelve drawing areas is closest to the screen (uppermost layer). Be placed.

In such effect control, when generating an effect screen (display screen), it is set in advance as a table divided into a plurality of display layers (scenario layers) corresponding to display elements of the effect screen, and then they are individually set. As a scenario, all the scenarios are synthesized in the form of a display layer, whereby a picture on one screen is generated and displayed on the display device 41.
In the effect display editing process, for example, in the effect display editing process, the “holding layer” holds on standby (decoration special drawing start storage display displayed on the standby hold display unit 41b) and on-hold (on-hold display) The decorative special drawing start display displayed on the part 41c is drawn. Further, in the “small symbol layer”, a small symbol (identification symbol displayed on the small symbol variation display unit 41d) and a number indicating the number of unsettled start-up memories (a number displayed on the numeric hold display unit 41e) And draw.

For example, as shown in FIG. 69, the “holding layer” is arranged closer to the screen than the “background layer”, “left symbol layer”, “right symbol layer”, and “middle symbol layer”.
Therefore, when the number of unstarted startup memories is 4 or more when executing the hold-up expansion effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 66 (a) or 70 (a), a background image (that is, “background layer” ”And a special display variation display game displayed on the special display variation display game display unit 41a (that is,“ left design layer ”,“ right design layer ”, and“ middle design layer ”). Since the entire drawn predetermined image) is hidden by the waiting holdings 1 to 4 and the execution holding (that is, the predetermined image drawn in the “holding layer”), the entire image becomes invisible. However, even if the number of unstored start-up memories is four or more, when the display area of any of the on-hold suspensions 1 to 4 is a small display area, for example, as shown in FIG. The background image and a part of the decoration special figure fluctuation display game displayed on the decoration special figure fluctuation display game display unit 41a are visible. In FIG. 69, the notice A to F layers are not shown for convenience.

In addition, when the number of unstarted start-up memories is 3, for example, as shown in FIG. 70 (b), a background image or a decoration special map variation display game displayed on the decoration special map variation display game display unit 41a. Among these, the portions overlapping with the on-hold hold 1 to 3 and the on-hold hold are not visible, but the other portions are visible.
In addition, when the number of unstarted start memories is 2, among the background image and the decorative special figure fluctuation display game displayed on the decorative special figure fluctuation display game display unit 41a, the waiting on hold 1, 2 and execution The portion overlapping with the medium suspension is not visible, but the other portions are visible.

If the number of unstarted start memories is one, for example, as shown in FIG. 70 (c), for example, a background image or a decoration special map variation display game displayed on the decoration special map variation display game display unit 41a. Among them, the portion overlapping with the on-hold hold 1 and the on-hold hold is not visible, but the other portions are visible.
If the number of unstarted start memories is zero, for example, as shown in FIG. 70 (d), a background image or a decoration special figure fluctuation display game displayed on the decoration special figure fluctuation display game display unit 41a is displayed. Among them, the portion overlapping with the suspension during execution is invisible, but the other portions are visible.
Note that the standby display mode may change to other than the normal display mode and the suggestion modes A to B during the shift. In other words, the standby display mode may include a display mode that appears only when shifting.

Further, when executing the hold expansion effect, whether or not the decoration special figure fluctuation display game displayed on the decoration special figure fluctuation display game display unit 41a is displayed behind the waiting hold (that is, the decoration special figure). Depending on whether or not the portion of the variable display game that overlaps with the on-hold hold becomes invisible, predetermined information (for example, expectation level or jackpot determination) may be suggested.
Specifically, for example, when there is a start memory with a high expectation level (for example, a start memory of a special figure variation display game in which an effect is executed in a performance mode with a high jackpot expectation degree) in the undigested start memory For example, as shown in FIG. 70, a special figure variation display game is displayed on the back side of the waiting hold, and when there is no start memory with high expectation in the undigested start memory, for example, FIG. As shown in 71, the decorative special figure variation display game is displayed on the near side of the waiting hold. In this case, even when the on-hold hold is displayed, the player can recognize that the degree of expectation is low when the entire decorative special figure variation display game is visible.
Also, for example, when the result of the special figure variation display game being executed is a big hit (or when there is a start memory that results in a big hit in the undigested start memory), for example, with a predetermined probability, As shown in FIG. 71, the decorative special figure variation display game is displayed on the near side of the waiting hold. In this case, even when the on-hold hold is displayed, the player can recognize that a big hit will occur if the entire decoration special figure variation display game is visible.

The said structure is realizable by changing the display layer which draws waiting hold | maintenance according to predetermined information (for example, expectation degree or jackpot decision).
That is, by storing the “holding layer” in which the on-hold hold and the on-hold hold are drawn in the drawing area for the motion management area 8, it is possible to display the decoration special figure variation display game on the back side of the on-hold hold. it can.

On the other hand, the “notice A layer” in which the on-hold hold is drawn is stored in the drawing area for the motion management area 1 (or the “notice B layer” in which the hold on hold is drawn is stored in the drawing area for the motion management area 2) Then, by storing the “holding layer” on which the on-hold hold is drawn in the drawing area for the motion management area 8, it is possible to display the decorative special figure variation display game on the near side of the on-hold hold.
In the case of displaying the special figure variation display game on the near side of the on-hold hold, the “notice A layer” in which the on-hold hold and the on-hold hold are drawn is stored in the drawing area for the motion management area 1 (or The “notice B layer” in which the on-hold hold and the on-hold hold are drawn is stored in the drawing area for the motion management area 2, and the display layer is not stored in the drawing area for the motion management area 8 (or nothing is drawn) It is also possible to configure such that no “reserved layer” is stored in the drawing area for the motion management area 8. When configured in this manner, the decorative special figure fluctuation display game is displayed on the near side of the on-hold hold and the on-hold hold.

In addition, a button notice effect can be performed as an effect in which a player's operation is intervened when the hold expansion effect is executed.
Specifically, when the effect control device 300 shifts to the specific mode, for example, as shown in FIG. Next, when the execution timing of the standby hold change effect arrives, the button notice effect is started, and, for example, as shown in FIG. The on-hold hold corresponding to the memory, in this case the on-hold hold 3), a promotion image that prompts the operation of the effect button 25 is displayed. Then, when the effect button 25 is operated within the operation effective period, for example, as shown in FIG. In the example shown in FIG. 72, with the operation of the effect button 25, the display mode of the on-hold hold 3 is changed from the normal display mode to the suggestion mode C (medium display area suggestion mode C).

The promotion image includes, for example, a button image imitating the effect button 25, an instruction image for instructing the operation mode of the effect button 25 (for example, a character image such as “Press!” Or “Sequentially!”), And the remaining operation valid period A timer image indicating the length (for example, a time bar image) and a preview image indicating an expectation degree or the like (in the case of the present embodiment, an image simulating one or a plurality of stars) are included. This promotion image is drawn, for example, in a notice layer (“notice E layer” or “notice F layer”) arranged on the nearer side of the screen than the “holding layer”.
Note that even if the effect button 25 is operated within the operation effective period, the display mode of the on-hold hold may not change. That is, when the production button 25 is operated within the operation effective period, it is possible to provide a case where the display mode of the on-hold hold is changed and a case where the display mode is not changed.

It is also possible to draw each image constituting the promotion image on a different display layer.
Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 73, a “button image layer” in which a button image is drawn and a timer image are drawn as a display layer arranged on the near side of the screen from the “holding layer”. It is also possible to provide a “timer image layer”, a “notice image layer” on which the notice image is drawn, and an “instruction image layer” on which the instruction image is drawn.
In the present embodiment, the promotion image indicates the degree of expectation according to the number of stars in the preview image. That is, the button image, the timer image, and the instruction image are the same regardless of the degree of expectation or the like, but the notice image differs depending on the degree of expectation or the like. The promotion image indicates an operation mode by an instruction image. That is, the button image, the timer image, and the preview image are the same regardless of the requested operation mode, but the instruction image differs depending on the requested operation mode. Therefore, by rendering each image constituting the promotion image on a different display layer, only the “notice image layer” differs depending on the degree of expectation among these layers, and the “instruction image” depends on the requested operation mode. Since only the “layer” is different, it is possible to save data capacity and improve development efficiency.

  Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 73, by arranging the “notice image layer” between the “button image layer” and the “instruction image layer” and on the front side of the screen from the “button image layer”, It is possible to display the preview image superimposed on the button image in front of the button image. Thus, the notice image can be made conspicuous, and the notice image is not hidden by the button image and is difficult to visually recognize, so that an effective notice effect can be performed.

Furthermore, the display position of the promotion image can be varied depending on the requested operation mode.
Specifically, when the button notice effect to be executed is a button notice effect of a type that requires an operation that requires a relatively short time, such as a single press effect, a promotion image is displayed in the central portion of the pending change target to be changed Is displayed. Therefore, in this case, when the facial expression image is displayed within the waiting hold for the change target, for example, as shown in FIG. 72B, the promotion image is displayed at a position overlapping the facial expression image.
On the other hand, when the button notice effect to be executed is a button notice effect of a type that requires an operation that takes a relatively long time, such as a repetitive hit effect, a promotion image is displayed in the corner of the change target that is on hold. Therefore, in this case, when the facial expression image is displayed within the waiting hold of the change target, the promotion image is displayed at a position that does not overlap the facial expression image, for example, as shown in FIG. Alternatively, the promotion image is displayed at a position that overlaps the facial expression image, but is less overlapped than the promotion image such as a single press effect.

Thus, by changing the display position of the promotion image according to the requested operation mode, not only the promotion image itself (for example, the instruction image in the promotion image) but also the display position of the promotion image is required. Therefore, the player can quickly recognize the requested operation mode.
In addition, when the button notice effect to be executed is a button notice effect of a type that requires an operation that takes a relatively long time, the display time of the promotion image (that is, the operation valid period) is relatively long. By displaying a promotion image at a position that does not overlap with the facial expression image (or a position that overlaps with the facial expression image but with little overlap), it is effective to prevent the visibility of the facial expression image from being impaired by the promotion image. Button notice effect can be executed.

That is, when most of the facial expression image overlaps with the promotion image, most of the facial expression image is hidden behind the promotion image, and the facial expression image is difficult to visually recognize until the promotion image disappears.
The button notice effect that requires an operation that requires a relatively short time is relatively short in the display time of the promotion image, and the time until the promotion image disappears is short, so even if most of the facial expression image overlaps with the promotion image The facial expression image can be checked immediately. On the other hand, the button notice effect that requires an operation that takes a relatively long time has a relatively long display time of the promotion image and a long time until the promotion image disappears. , It is difficult to check facial expression images. Therefore, in a button notice effect that requires an operation that takes a relatively long time, a promotion image is displayed at a position that does not overlap the facial expression image on hold (or a position that overlaps with the facial expression image but has little overlap). Thus, it is possible to ensure the visibility of the facial expression image (that is, to correctly confirm which facial expression image is displayed within the standby hold).

Moreover, it is also possible to perform a suggestion effect that suggests the waiting hold to be changed by another waiting hold when executing the hold expansion effect. This suggestion effect is an effect included in the pending change effect. That is, as described above, in the present embodiment, the switching effect (when the display mode is changed) for switching the display mode of the decoration special figure start memory display to the suggestion mode, and the execution of the switching effect before the start of the switching effect is suggested. The suggestion effect to be performed (before the display mode is changed) is included in the pending change effect.
Specifically, for example, a new start memory is generated, and a standby hold corresponding to the start memory is displayed from the beginning by a lottery or display area lottery of a standby hold change effect for the start memory. It is assumed that it is determined to display in the area suggestion mode B and to display in the medium display area suggestion mode C from a predetermined timing.

In this case, for example, as shown in FIG. 75 (a), the production control device 300 first performs the waiting hold corresponding to the start-up memory, that is, the change waiting wait hold (here, the hold hold 2). The display area suggestion mode B is used. Further, when the change target standby hold is displayed, the standby hold displayed before the change target standby hold (here, standby hold 1) is applied to the change target standby hold. Then, the suggestion effect is executed.
In the example shown in FIG. 75, the facial expression image in the on-hold hold other than the change target on-hold hold pays attention to the change target on-hold hold. While the expression image in the middle hold is directed toward the change target standby hold, the standby hold other than the change target standby hold is made to act on the change target standby hold. The method of action is not limited to this. For example, by performing an effect in which a suggestion image (for example, an image imitating a sword) jumps from a standby hold other than the change target standby hold to a change target standby hold, other than the change target standby hold The waiting hold may be applied to the waiting hold to be changed.

Next, when a new start memory is generated, the effect control device 300 acts on the waiting hold for the change target as the waiting hold corresponding to the start memory, for example, as shown in FIGS. 75 (b) and 75 (c). The suggestion effect is executed by displaying the waiting hold. When the predetermined timing is reached, for example, as shown in FIG. 75D, the display mode of the on-hold standby to be changed is changed to the suggestion mode C of the intermediate display area.
In addition, after performing the suggestion effect, a promotion image that prompts the operation of the effect button 25 is displayed, and when the effect button 25 is operated within the operation effective period, the standby display mode is changed. Is also possible.

Moreover, even if the suggestion effect is executed, the display mode of the on-hold hold may not be changed. In other words, after executing the suggestion effect, it is possible to provide a case where the display mode of the on-hold hold is changed and a case where the display mode is not changed.
In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 75, the display mode of pending holding to be changed is changed from the suggestion mode to another suggestion mode after the suggestion effect, but of course, after the suggestion effect, the normal display mode May be changed to a suggestion mode.

In this way, by performing the suggestion effect that suggests the change target standby hold by another standby hold, the change target standby hold becomes clear.
For example, when there are a plurality of waiting holds, it is difficult to determine which waiting hold is a change target. In particular, when the display mode of the standby hold that is the change target is the same as the display mode of the standby hold that is not the change target, it is difficult to determine which of the standby holds is the change target. On the other hand, as in the example shown in FIG. 75, the display mode of standby hold 2 (waiting hold to be changed) and the display mode of standby hold 4 (standby hold not to be changed) are the same. However, since the waiting hold 4 is acting on the waiting hold 2, the player easily recognizes that the waiting hold 2 is a change target (ie, the waiting hold 2 should be noted). can do. Therefore, during the execution of the hold change effect, it is possible to execute the hold change effect in which the place (point) to be noticed is easy to understand by performing the suggestion effect suggesting the waiting hold to be changed by other hold on hold. It becomes possible.

  In the present embodiment, the standby hold display unit 41b is set to the entire display area of the display device 41 when the hold expansion effect is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the standby hold display unit 41b when the hold enlargement effect is executed. Should be larger than the size of the standby hold display section 41b in a period other than the execution of the hold expansion effect. Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 76 (a), the central portion of the display area of the display device 41 (for example, the portion where the decorative special figure variation display game display portion 41a is provided) and the lower portion (for example, the hold expansion effect). In a period other than the execution time of, the standby hold display unit 41b may be set in a portion where the standby hold display unit 41b and the on-hold hold display unit 41c are provided) to execute the hold expansion effect.

Further, in the present embodiment, the vertically long standbys are arranged side by side when executing the hold expansion effect, but the shape and arrangement of the standby hold are not limited to this. Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 76 (b), a horizontally long rectangular waiting hold may be arranged vertically, for example, as shown in FIG. 76 (c), a horizontally long elliptical shape is used. The waiting suspensions may be arranged vertically, or the vertically long oval waiting suspensions may be arranged side by side. For example, as shown in FIG. 77 (a), circular waiting suspensions are arranged side by side. (Or vertically arranged).
In the present embodiment, the waiting hold is arranged side by side and the waiting hold is shifted to the left whenever the start memory is digested. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the start memory is digested. It is also possible to configure the waiting hold every time to shift to the right. In addition, when the on-hold hold is arranged vertically, it is possible to configure the standby hold to shift up each time the start-up memory is consumed, or to shift down. Is possible.

In the present embodiment, the facial expression image is displayed within the on-hold hold. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as shown in FIG. 77 (a), the facial expression image may be displayed outside the standby hold. Further, in the present embodiment, at the time of execution of the hold expansion effect, depending on the expression image (including “no expression image”) in the on-hold hold, any of the display modes (normal display mode and suggestion modes A to C). However, instead of (or in addition to) the facial expression image, a standby image image other than the facial expression image such as a character image such as “Hot!” It is also possible to display within the middle hold (or outside the waiting hold).
For example, as shown in FIG. 77 (b), it is also possible to execute a sub-game that displays a plurality of identification information in a variable state within the waiting on-hold (or outside the waiting on-hold) when the hold expansion effect is executed. is there. In the example shown in FIG. 77 (b), the sub game is executed in the waiting hold 3. This sub game may be a game corresponding to the special figure fluctuation display game, or may be a game not corresponding to the special figure fluctuation display game.

Further, in the present embodiment, during execution of the hold expansion effect, the on-hold hold is arranged out of the waiting hold column, but is not limited to this, for example, as shown in FIG. 77 (c). , The center of gravity G0 of the on-hold hold on the straight line L (that is, each on-hold hold) so that the on-hold hold (decoration special figure start memory display with lattice hatching in the figure) does not deviate from the stand-by hold line You may arrange | position on the same straight line as the gravity center G1.
Further, in the case of the present embodiment, at the time of execution of the hold expansion effect, the standby hold display unit 41b is configured to display a maximum of four standby holds. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, FIG. As shown in FIG. 78 (b), it may be configured to display a maximum of eight on-hold holds on the stand-by hold display unit 41b even when the hold expansion effect is executed.

In the present embodiment, the special figure variation display game is executed in the order of winning in the start winning area. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, one special figure fluctuation display game (for example, the second special figure fluctuation display) (Game) may be executed preferentially.
When one special figure variation display game is configured to be preferentially executed, only the on-hold hold corresponding to the first start memory, which is the right to execute the first special figure variation display game, is executed when the hold expansion effect is executed. It is also possible to display only the on-hold hold corresponding to the second start memory that is the right to execute the second special figure fluctuation display game, or the first special figure fluctuation display game. It is also possible to display both the on-hold hold corresponding to the first start memory that is the execution right and the on-hold hold corresponding to the second start memory that is the execution right of the second special figure variable display game. .

  Thus, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a game (special figure variation display game) is executed based on the establishment of the start condition, and the game value is given to the player when the result of the game becomes a special result. Is a game machine that generates a special gaming state to which a predetermined random number is extracted based on the establishment of a start condition and stored as a game start memory, and corresponds to the start memory Start memory display control means (effect control device 300) for displaying start memory display (holding on hold) to be displayed on display device 41, and first variable display effect (decoration) for variably displaying a plurality of identification symbols corresponding to the game Fluctuation display effect control for displaying on the display device 41 a variation display executed by the special figure variation display game display unit 41a) and a second variation display effect (a variation display executed by the small symbol variation display unit 41d). The first variation display effect is displayed on the center side of the display area of the display device 41 with respect to the second variation display effect and is in the display state in the normal mode. In the specific mode different from the mode, the second variable display effect is in the display state in both the normal mode and the specific mode, and the start memory display is in the specific mode (when the hold expansion effect is executed) It is displayed larger than in the normal mode (period other than the execution time of the hold expansion effect).

Therefore, during the specific mode, the start-up memory display (standby hold) is displayed larger than during the normal mode, and the first variation display effect (decoration special figure variation display game) is not displayed. Therefore, since the start memory display can be made conspicuous, it is possible to display the start memory display that enhances the interest of the player.
In the present embodiment, the first variation display effect (decorative special figure variation display game) is displayed even in the specific mode (that is, during execution of the hold expansion effect), and the first variation display effect is displayed in the start memory display ( It is configured so that the first variation display effect is not displayed by displaying it over the start memory display on the back side from the standby hold), but is not limited to this. It is also possible not to display the 1-variable display effect. In other words, the “non-display state” may be a state in which a display (a display layer in which a predetermined image is drawn in a corresponding drawing area is stored) is hidden by another image but cannot be seen, or is not displayed in the first place (that is, a corresponding display state) The display layer may not be stored in the drawing area to be stored (or the display layer in which nothing is drawn is stored in the corresponding drawing area). When the number of unstarted start memories is less than 4 in a state where it is displayed but hidden by another image, for example, as shown in FIG. 70, a part or all of the first variation display effect is displayed. In the state where it is displayed (becomes visible) but is not displayed in the first place, even when the number of unstarted start memories is less than 4, the first variation display effect is not displayed (not visible).

In addition, the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment has a pre-determination unit (game control device 100) that predetermines a predetermined random number before a game corresponding to the predetermined random number (special figure variation display game) is executed. ), And the display mode of the start memory display (holding on hold) displayed during the specific mode (during the execution of the hold expansion effect), a normal mode (normal display mode) that does not suggest the result of prior determination, There are suggested modes (suggested modes A to C) that suggest the result of the prior determination, and the startup memory display of the normal mode is a predetermined image in the startup memory display (in the case of this embodiment, a facial expression representing an expressionless expression). The start memory display of the first mode (suggest modes B and C) in which an image other than the predetermined image is displayed in the start memory display, and the start memory No image is displayed in the display The start memory display of the second mode is more reliable than the start memory display of the first mode, because the game result based on the corresponding start memory is a special result. It can be configured so that (expectation) is low.
By configuring in this way, it is possible to perform an on-hold effect according to the reliability (expectation), and therefore it is possible to display a start memory display that enhances the player's interest. Furthermore, since the start memory display with low reliability (expectation) is not displayed in the start memory display (holding on hold), the start memory display with low reliability can be made inconspicuous. Can be made conspicuous, and a start-up memory display that enhances the interest of the player can be displayed.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment includes an operation unit (production button 25) for production that can be operated by the player, and the start-up memory display control unit (production control device 300) uses a specific mode (pending expansion production). When the operating means is operated at a predetermined timing at the time of execution, it is possible to change the image in the start memory display (in the case of the present embodiment, an expression image (including no expression image)) ( (See FIG. 72).
With this configuration, when the operating means is operated, the image in the start memory display (standby hold) can be changed, that is, the display mode of the start memory display can be changed. It is possible to display a start memory display that enhances the interest.
In the present embodiment, for example, when the standby display mode changes from the normal display mode to any one of the intermediate display area suggestion modes A to C, or the intermediate display area suggestion modes AC When changing from any one of them to the other, only the facial expression image in the on-hold hold changes, and the on-hold hold outer frame does not change. Therefore, in this case, the background image and the decoration special figure fluctuation table game remain hidden by the waiting hold even after the display mode of the waiting hold changes.
To “change the image in the start-up memory display”, the image is switched to a different image (for example, the display mode becomes the suggestion mode B or the suggestion mode C), or the image is deleted (for example, the display mode) To suggestive mode A).

Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the variable display effect control means (effect control device 300) has a plurality of identification symbols in the start memory display (standby hold) in the specific mode (when the hold expansion effect is executed). The third variation display effect (sub game) for variably displaying can be configured to be displayed on the display device 41 (FIG. 77 (b)).
By configuring in this way, the third variation display effect (sub game) can be performed within the start memory display (holding on hold), so that the start memory display that enhances the player's interest can be displayed. it can.

In addition, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a game (special figure fluctuation display game) is executed based on the establishment of the start condition, and a game value is given to the player when the result of the game becomes a special result. A game machine that generates a special gaming state to be executed, wherein a predetermined random number is extracted based on the establishment of a start condition and stored as a start memory of the game, and a start corresponding to the start memory Start memory display control means (effect control device 300) for displaying a memory display (standby hold), and a prior determination means for predetermining a predetermined random number before a game corresponding to the predetermined random number is executed (The production control device 300), and the center-of-gravity interval between adjacent start memory displays is set to a predetermined interval (distance d1). The start memory display control means , Confidence in the selected display area on the basis of (expectation)), can be configured to display the start memory (see Figure 67).
Accordingly, since the result of the prior determination (for example, reliability (expected degree)) can be suggested by the display area of the start memory display, the start memory display that enhances the interest of the player can be displayed.
Further, since the start memory display (holding on hold) is arranged at equal intervals, it is possible to display a suitably arranged start memory display.

  Note that the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine as shown in the above-described embodiment as a gaming machine, for example, other pachinko gaming machines, arrange ball gaming machines, sparrow ball gaming machines, etc. It can be applied to all gaming machines that use this game ball. The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine. The slot machine is not limited to a slot machine that uses medals, and includes, for example, all slot machines such as a slot machine that uses game balls.

  In addition, it should be considered that the embodiment disclosed this time is illustrative and not restrictive in all respects. The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, rather than the description above, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.

10 gaming machine 25 production button (operation means)
41 Display device 41b Standby hold display section (first display area)
41c On-hold display section (second display area)
100 Game control device (start-up storage means, prior determination means)
300 effect control device (starting memory display control means, variable display effect control means)
d1 distance (predetermined interval)
G0 center of gravity pending during execution (centroid of memory display during change)
G1 Waiting center of gravity (starting memory display center of gravity)
L straight line (predetermined straight line)
P Intersections T01, T12, T23, T34, T45, T56, T67, T78 Triangle

Claims (1)

In a gaming machine that executes a game based on establishment of a start condition and generates a special gaming state that gives a player a gaming value when the result of the game becomes a special result,
Starting storage means for extracting a predetermined random number based on the establishment of the starting condition and storing it as a start storage of the game;
Start memory display control means for displaying a start memory display corresponding to the start memory;
Pre-determining means for pre-determining the predetermined random number before the game corresponding to the predetermined random number is executed,
The center-of-gravity interval between the start memory displays adjacent to each other is set to a predetermined interval,
The gaming machine characterized in that the starting memory display control means can display the starting memory display in a display area selected based on the result of the prior determination.

Images